Home

Samsung CLX-6220 User's Manual

1. Tools Name Function ml Save Saves the image i Undo Cancels your last action a Redo Restores the action you canceled Ki Scroll Allows you to scroll through the image ih Crop Crops the selected image area Eci Zoom Out Zooms the image out El Zoom In Zooms the image in E Scale Allows you to scale the image size you can be enter the size manually or set the rate to scale proportionally vertically or horizontally Rotate Allows you to rotate the image you can select Lr the number of degrees from the drop down list Fi Flip Allows you to flip the image vertically or GT horizontally Brightness Allows you to adjust the brightness or contrast of the image or to invert the image Properties Shows the properties of the image Bs For further details about the Image Manager application refer to the on screen help Scanning_ 9 faxing This chapter gives you information about using the fax feature in your machine This chapter includes Preparing to fax Using a fax in your computer Sending a fax Receiving a fax Z eYou cannot use this machine as a fax through the internet phone line For more information ask your internet service provider eWe recommend using traditional analog phone services PSTN public switched telephone network when connecting telephone lines to use the Fax If you use other Internet services DSL ISDN VoIP you can improve the connect
2. Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page The paper may be too damp Try printing with a fresh ream of paper Do not open reams of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture If background scatter occurs on an envelope change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side Printing on seams can cause problems If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page adjust the print resolution through your software application or in Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 Wrinkles or creases AaBbCc e Ensure that the paper is loaded properly e Check the paper type and quality See Print media specifications on page 3 e Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray Misformed characters AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images the paper stock may be too slick Try different paper See Print media specifications on page 3 If characters are improperly formed and producing a wavy effect the scanner unit may need service See Cleaning the scan unit on page 3 Back of printouts are dirty Check for leaking toner Clean the inside of the machine See Cleaning the inside o
3. 1A 7 When selecting envelopes consider the following factors Weight The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g m otherwise jam may occur Construction Prior to printing envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl and should not contain air Condition Envelopes should not be wrinkled nicked either damaged Temperature Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the machine during operation Use only well constructed envelopes with sharp and well creased folds Do not use stamped envelopes Do not use envelopes with clasps snaps windows coated lining self adhesive seals or other synthetic materials Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope Media and tray_ 5 1 Acceptable 2 Unacceptable Envelopes with a peel off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine s fusing temperature about 170 C 338 F for 0 1 second The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling creasing or jams and may even damage the fuser For the best print quality position margins no closer than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope Avoid printing over the area where the envelope s seams meet Labels To avoid damaging the machine use only labels designed for use in laser machines
4. Exception OE Spool 32 or Illegal Operation messages appear Close all other applications reboot Windows and try printing again Fail To Print A printer timeout error occurred messages appear These messages may appear during printing Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing If the message appears in standby mode or after printing has been completed check the connection and or whether an error has occurred Troubleshooting 20 Z Refer to Microsoft Windows User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages Common Linux problems condition Suggested solutions condition Suggested solutions The machine does not print Check if the printer driver is installed in your system Open Unified Driver Configurator and switch to the Printers tab in Printers configuration window to look at the list of available machines Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list If not open Add new printer wizard to set up your device Check if the machine is started Open Printers configuration and select your machine on the printers list Look at the description in the Selected printer pane If its status contains Stopped string press the Start button After that normal operation of the machine should be restored The stopped status might be activated when some problems in printing occurred For
5. Green Blinking e When the backlight slowly blinks the machine is receiving data from the computer e When the backlight blinks rapidly the machine is printing data On The machine is on line and can be used Red Blinking e Aminor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared Check the display message When the problem is cleared the machine resumes e Asmall amount of toner is left in the cartridge The estimated cartridge life of toner is close Prepare a new cartridge for replacement You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 Redistributing toner on page 1 On e A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 e A paper jam has occurred See Clearing paper jams on page 3 e The cover is opened Close the cover e There is no paper in the tray Load paper in the tray e The machine has stopped due to a major error Check the display message See Understanding display messages on page 8 a Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life which indicates the average capacity of print outs and is designed pursuant to ISO IEC 19798 The number of pages may be affected by operating environment printing interval graphics media typ
6. 2 From the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list The Edit Watermarks window appears 3 Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box You can enter up to 256 characters The message displays in the preview window When the First Page Only box is checked the watermark prints on the first page only 4 Select watermark options You can select the font name style size and shade from the Font Attributes section as well as set the angle of the watermark from the Message Angle section 5 Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermarks list 6 When you have finished editing click OK or Print until you exit the Print window To stop printing the watermark select None from the Watermark drop down list Editing a watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 Click the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list The Edit Watermarks window appears 3 Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options 4 Click Update to save the changes 5 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Deleting a watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 Click the Advanced tab select Edit from the Water
7. 2 Open the Applications folder gt System Preferences and click Print amp Fax 3 Press the icon A display window showing the name of your shared printer appears 4 Select your machine and click Add Getting started_ 6 network setup This chapter gives you step by step instructions for setting up the network connected machine and software This chapter includes e Network environment e Introducing useful network programs e Using a wired network Network environment You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine You can set up the basic network settings through the machine s control panel The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine Item Requirements Network interface e Ethernet 10 100 Base TX e 802 11 b g Wireless LAN Optional Network operating system Windows 2000 XP 2003 2008 Vista 7 2008 Server R2 e Various Linux OS e Mac OS X 10 3 10 6 e UNIX Network protocols e TCP IPv4 e DHCP BOOTP e DNS WINS Bonjour SLP UPnP e Standard TCP IP Printing RAW LPR IPP WSD e SNMPv 1 2 3 HTTP S Telnet SMTP S LDAP S IPSec e SMB FTP Kerberos e TCP IPv6 DHCP DNS RAW LPR SNMPv 1 2 3 HTTP S IPSec See IPv6 Configuration on page 6 Wireless security e Authentication Open System Shared Optional Key WPA Personal WPA2 Personal PSK e Encryption WEP64 WEP128 TKIP
8. Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions Condition Suggested Solutions The print quality of photos is not good Images are not clear The resolution of the photo is very low Reduce the photo size If you increase the photo size in the software application the resolution will be reduced Before printing the machine emits vapor near the output tray Using damp paper can cause vapor during printing This is not a problem Just keep printing The machine does not print special sized paper such as billing paper Paper size and paper size setting do not match Set the correct paper size in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 Printing quality problems If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly there might be a reduction in print quality See the table below to clear the problem Dropouts If faded areas generally rounded occur randomly on the page e Asingle sheet of paper may be defective Try reprinting the job e The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface Try a different brand of paper See Print media specifications on page 3 e The paper lot is bad The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner Try a different kind or brand of paper e Change the printer option and try again Go to Printing Pre
9. If you are experiencing CLX S6250A frequent paper supply problems you can attach an additional 500 sheets tray You can print documents in various sizes and types of print materials Optional tray 2 Hard disk Allows you to enhance ML HDK300 CLX 6250 Series the machine s capability only and print in various ways IEEE 802 11 b g Allows you to connect ML NWA40L Wireless LAN your printer to a CLX 6250 Series wireless network only a Depending on your country wireless LAN cards may not be available Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought your printer Maintenance parts To purchase maintenance parts contact the source where you bought the machine Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized service provider dealer or the retailer where you bought the machine The warranty does not cover the replacement of any maintenance parts once it has reached its Average Yield Maintenance parts are replaced at specific intervals to avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts see table below The purpose of which is to maintain your machine in top working condition The maintenance parts below should be replaced when the life span of each item has been met parts Average yield Fuser unit Approx 100 000 pages Document feeder friction pad Approx 75 000 pages Document feeder pick up roller A
10. The following pane is the first pane you will see when you open the printer properties pane Select other advanced features from the drop down list Printer 10 88 189 158 kad fa Presets Standard wa Copies i F Collated C Two Sided Pages All QO From 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 H 20 99 by 29 70 cm Orientation LI 1 ka Print header and footer lofl 2 PDFv Supplies Cancel C Print Layout The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page You can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper Select Layout from the drop down list under Orientation to access the following features ePages Per Sheet This option determines how many pages to be printed on one page See Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper on page 10 eLayout Direction This option allows you to select the printing direction on a page similar to the examples on UI Border This option allows you to print a border around each page on the sheet Two Sided This option allows you to print on both sides of a paper See Printing on both sides of paper on page 10 Reverse Page Orientation This option allows you to rotate paper 180 degrees Graphics The Graphics tab provides options for selecting Quality Select Graphics from the drop down list under Orientation to access the graphic features Quality This option allows you to select the printing resolution The high
11. If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems check the number of pages the machine has printed Replace the corresponding parts if necessary 1 Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Maintenance and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Supplies Life and press OK Press the up down arrow until the item you want appears and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode ee MO BO Supplies and accessories 10 specifications This chapter guides you about this machine s specifications This chapter includes e Hardware specifications e Environmental specifications e Electrical specifications e Print media specifications l4 The specification values are listed below specification are subject to change without notice See www samsung com printer for possible changes in information Hardware specifications Item Description Dimension Height 651 mm 25 63 inches Depth 498 mm 19 61 inches Width 468 mm 18 43 inches Weight Machine with consumables 37 40 Kg 82 45 Ibs Package weight Paper 5 8 Kg 12 7 Ibs Plastic 1 8 Kg 3 9 Ibs Environmental specifications Item Description Noise Level Ready mode 35 dB A Printing mode e CLX 6220 Series 53 dB A e CLX 6250 Series 54 dB A Temperature Operation 15 to 32 C 59 to 89 6 F Stora
12. Press Start to begin copying KO 00 N So a o Watermark copying You can copy the original with a watermark For example you can use it when you want to have large gray letters such as Top Secret or Confidential printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of the COpy Copying 4 1 Press KS Copy on the control panel gt mep Place originals face up in the document feeder Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the scanner lid Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight WaterMark and press OK Press the up down arrow until the binding Message option you want is highlighted and OK Press the up down arrow until the binding Pages option you want is highlighted and OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Press Start to begin copying Copying both sides of the originals You can set the machine to print copies on both sides of paper 4 The Duplex options may vary between document feeder or scanner glass 1 Press SG Copy on the control panel Place originals face up in the document feeder Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the scanner lid Press Duplex on the control panel Press the up down arrow until the binding option you want is highlighted Off Prints in normal mode 1 gt
13. There is a problem in the machine Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists call for service Original paper Jam Original paper Jam inside of scanner Remove Jam The load original has jammed in the document feeder Clear the jam See Clearing original document jams on page 2 Memory Full Cancel Start The memory is full Press the left right arrow to highlight Cancel or Start then press OK If you select Cancel the machine stops the fax job If you select Start the machine only sends scanned documents of the fax job Original paper Jam Original paper is too long for scanner Check size The original is too long for scanner Check the originals See Preparing Originals on page 1 Output Bin Full Output Bin Full Remove printed paper The document output tray is full The document output tray can hold up to 160 sheets of plain paper Once the paper is removed from the document output tray the printer resumes printing Paper Jam in MP Paper has jammed in the multi purpose tray area Clear the jam See In the multi purpose tray on page 4 Memory Full The memory is full Split the transmission Divide the job into more than one operation Memory Full The memory is full Print or remove the Fax memory is full Print or remove received fax job received fax data in the memory Paper Jam in tray1 Paper has jamme
14. This program is for network model only http solution samsungprinter com e Samsung AnyWeb Print helps personal users to screen capture the website screen in Windows Internet Explorer easily http solution samsungprinter com personal anywebprint e Samsung Easy Color Manager helps Samsung color laser printer users to adjust color as they like http solution samsungprinter com personal colormanager e XPS printer driver used to print documents in XPS print path XPS printer driver can be installed only on Windows Vista or higher e http www samsung com printer About this user s guide 2 features of your new product Your new machine is equipped with a number of special features that improve the quality of the documents you print Special Features NI ANN Mit AD Print with excellent quality and speed e You can print in a full range of colors using cyan magenta yellow and black e You can print with a resolution of up to 9 600 x 600 dpi effective output e CLX 6220 Series prints up to 20 ppm A4 sized paper or up to 21 ppm letter sized paper e CLX 6250 Series prints up to 24 ppm A4 sized paper or up to 25 ppm letter sized paper Handle many different types of printable material e The multi purpose tray supports envelopes labels custom sized media postcards and heavy paper e The tray 1 and optional tray support plain paper
15. X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive and click OK elf the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control windows elf the AutoPlay window appears in Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Yes in the User Account Control windows 3 Select Administrator Installation gt Create Customized Installer If necessary select a language from the drop down list Administrator s Guide Windows only 3 10 11 Read License Agreement and select accept the terms of the License Agreement Then click Next Select Package Type window appears Select Normal setup exe or Self Extraction Package If you place the mouse cursor over the package type you can see the detailed information on the bottom right side of the window Select Software and Utilities to Install window appears Check the device drivers or application software you want to included in the setup package and click Next Select Printer connection window appears Select the printer connection type and click Next elf you selected Network Connection Search Network Printers window appears type in the IP address or host name in the information field than click Search when you are finished click Next The discovered printer list will show network printers on the same subnet If you want to speci
16. representative The connection printer cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly Disconnect the machine printer cable and reconnect it The connection printer cable between the computer and the machine is defective If possible attach the printer cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job You can also try using a different machine printer cable The port setting is incorrect Check the Windows printer settings to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port If the computer has more than one port make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one The machine may be configured incorrectly Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct See Opening printing preferences on page 2 The printer driver may be incorrectly installed Repair the machine software See Installing USB connected machine s driver on page 3 The machine is malfunctioning Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a system error Contact a service representative Troubleshooting_ 14 Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions The document size is so big that the hard disk space of the computer is insufficient to access the print job Make available more hard disk space and print the document again C
17. Door is open or The front door is not Close the front door Check Transfer belt securely latched until it locks into place IP Conflict The IP address is used Check the IP address or This IP address conflicts with that of other system elsewhere obtain a new IP address Connection Error Connection with the SMTP server failed Check the server settings and the network cable Enter Again You entered an unavailable item Enter the correct item again Fax memory is almost full The fax memory is full Delete unnecessary fax jobs and retransmit after more memory becomes available Alternatively split the transmission into more than one operation Fan error Error aaa Turn off then on There is a problem in the machine Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists call for service Fuser error Error aaa Turn off then on There is a problem in the machine Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists call for service ccc toner Not Compatible ccc toner cartridge is not compatible Check guide The toner cartridge you have installed is not for your machine Install a Samsung genuine toner cartridge designed for your machine Fuser unit Not Installed Fuser unit is not installed Install it The fuser unit is not installed Call for service Troubleshooting 9 Mess
18. For more information about using Image Capture refer to the Image Capture s help Use TWAIN compliant software to apply more scan options eYou can also scan using TWAIN compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop Scan process differ according to TWAIN compliant software Please refer to the user s guide of the software elf scanning does not operate in Image Capture update Mac OS to the latest version Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X 10 3 9 or higher and Mac OS X 10 4 7 or higher Scanning with network i 2 6 T 4 Scanning_ 7 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 1 Start Applications and click Image Capture For Mac OS X 10 4 10 5 Click Devices and click Browse Devices For Mac OS X 10 6 Select your device below SHARED Skip to step 7 For Mac OS X 10 4 Select your machine in Twain devices option Make sure that Use TWAIN software checkbox is checked and click Connect elf a warning message appears click Change Port to select port elf TWAIN UI appears from the Preference tab click Change Port to select port K Refer to Scan Manager for Change port use See Setting scan information in Scan Manager on page 7 For Mac OS X 10 5 Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside yo
19. Press the up down arrow to highlight Scan Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight USB Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight the setting you want and press OK You can set the following options Scan Size Sets the image size oa NO Using USB memory device_ 1 The scan size options may vary between document feeder or scanner glass eOriginal Type Sets the original document s type Resolution Sets the image resolution Scan Color Sets the color mode If you select Mono in this option you cannot select JPEG in Scan Format Scan Format Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved When you select TIFF or PDF you can select to scan multiple pages If you select JPEG in this option you cannot select Mono in Scan Color 6 Press the up down arrow until the desired status is highlighted and press OK 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to set other setting options 8 When you have finished press Stop Clear to return to ready mode You can change the default scan settings For details see Changing the default scan settings on page 6 Printing from a USB memory device You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device You can print TIFF BMP JPEG and PRN files If your USB memory device has certain features example security key security partition booting disk password settings and so forth do not use the USB memory device with your machine The files stored in
20. Press the up down arrow to select the mode you want Press OK to save the selection Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode AY ee et ee Setting sounds You can control the following sounds e Key Sound Turns the key sound On or Off With this option set to On a tone sounds each time a key is pressed e Alarm Sound Turns the alarm sound On or Off With this option set to On an alarm tone sounds when an error occurs or fax communication ends e Speaker Turns On or Off the sounds from the telephone line through the speaker such as a dial tone or a fax tone With this option set to Comm which means Comm the speaker is on until the remote machine answers You can adjust the volume level using On Hook Dial e Ringer Adjusts the ringer volume For the ringer volume you can select Off Low Mid and High Speaker ringer key sound and alarm sound 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Sound Volume and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow until the sound option you want highlights and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow until the desired status or volume for the sound you have selected highlights and press OK 6 If necessary repeat steps 4 through 5 to set other sounds 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Speaker volume To adjust the volume using On Hook Dial 1 Press On Hook Dial
21. Searching with a particular first letter 1 Press gt Scan Email and Address Book on the control panel 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight Search amp Dial and press OK 3 Press the up down arrow until the option you want is highlighted and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight ID and press OK 5 Enter the first few letters of the name you want 6 Press the up down arrow until the name you want is highlighted and press OK Printing Address Book You can check your Address Book information by printing a list 1 Press gt Scan Email and Address Book on the control panel 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight Print and press OK 3 Press the up down arrow until the option you want is highlighted and press OK Your Address Book information prints out Scanning originals and sending to your computer Scan to PC You can scan an image on the machine via the Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program that is installed in your networked computer For USB connected machine This is a basic scanning method for usb connected machine 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 1 3 Press gt Scan Email on the control panel 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Scan To PC and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow to highlight Loca
22. A dial tone sounds from the earpiece 2 Press the left right arrow until you hear the volume you want 3 Press On Hook Dial to save the change and return to ready mode Entering characters using the number keypad As you perform various tasks you may need to enter names and numbers For example when you set up your machine you enter your name or your company s name and the fax number When you store fax numbers or email addresses in memory you may also enter the corresponding names Entering alphanumeric characters 1 When you are prompted to enter a letter locate the button labeled with the character you want Press the button until the correct letter appears on the display For example to enter the letter O press 6 labeled with MNO Each time you press 6 the display shows a different letter M N O m n o and finally 6 You can enter special characters such as space plus sign and etc For details see the below section 2 To enter additional letters repeat step 1 If the next letter is printed on the same button move the cursor by pressing the left right arrow button and then press the button labeled with the letter you want The cursor will move to the right and the next letter will appear on the display You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice 3 When you have finished entering letters press OK Keypad letters and numbers Some of the follow key values may not appear depending on the job you
23. COPY on the control panel 2 Place originals face up in the document feeder Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the scanner lid Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Layout and press OK Press the up down arrow until 2up or 4up highlights and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Press Start to begin copying ak Po CJ T i Wh eae eS Z You cannot adjust the copy size using Reduce Enlarge for the N Up feature Poster copying Your original will be divided into 9 portions You can paste the printed pages together to make one poster sized document This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass auc Gah NG A 3x3 1 Press KS COPY on the control panel 2 Place a single original face down on the scanner glass 3 Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Layout and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Poster Copy and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Press Start to begin copying Your original is divided into 9 portions Each portion is scanned and printed one by one in the following order ONDA Clone copying T
24. E Black C5082L CLT C5082L Cyan M5082L CLT M5082L Magenta Y5082L CLT Y5082L Yellow Paper transfer Approx 50 000 pages CLT T508 belt When the transfer belt has worn out with abrasion you need to change it By this time you may be notified with the transfer belt related message on the display a Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC 19798 b Region A Albania Austria Belgium Bosnia Bulgaria Croatia Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Italy Macedonia Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Romania Serbia Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland UK To replace a toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 YH Depending on the options and percentage of image area job mode used the toner cartridge s lifespan may differ You must purchase supplies including toner cartridges in the same country where you purchased your machine Otherwise supplies will be incompatable with your machine since the system configurations vary from country to country Supplies and accessories 1 Available accessories You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine s performance and capacity Accessory function Part name Memory module Extend your machine s e CLX 6220 Series memory capacity CLP MEM201 128 MB CLP MEM202 256 MB e CLX 6250 Series ML MEM150 128 MB ML MEM160 256 MB ML MEM170 512 MB
25. If black vertical streaks appear on the page e The surface drum part of the toner cartridge inside the machine has probably been scratched Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 If white vertical streaks appear on the page e The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty See Cleaning the inside on page 2 If vertical streaks appear on the page e The surface of the scanner glass and its white sheet may be dirty Clean these unit See Cleaning the scan unit on page 3 Toner specks The paper may not meet specifications for example the paper may be too moist or rough See Print media specifications on page 3 The transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine Contact a service representative The paper path may need cleaning Contact a service representative Color or Black background AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable e Change to a lighter weight paper See Print media specifications on page 3 e Check the environmental conditions very dry conditions or a high level of humidity higher than 80 RH can increase the amount of background shading e Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 If this problem persists contact a service representative Troubleshoo
26. Scan Size Original Type Resolution Scan Color Scan Format Send Report System Setup Machine Setup Machine ID Machine Fax No Date amp Time Clock Mode Form Menu Select Form Language Default Mode Power Save Timeout Job Timeout Altitude Adjust Auto Continue Paper Substitution Net Accounting Import Setting Export Setting Color Report Paper Setup Paper Size Paper Type Paper Source Wide A4 Sound Volume Key Sound Alarm Sound Speaker Ringer Report All Reports Configuration Supplies Info Address Book Send Report Sent Report Fax Rev Report Scheduled Jobs JunkFax Report Network Info User Auth List PCL Font List PS Font List Accounting Report Stored Job Completed Job Net Auth Log Counter info Fax Options Maintenance CLR Empty Msg Supplies Life Color Serial Number Toner Low Alert Machine status and advanced feature_ 6 d This menu only appears when an optional wireless network interface Items Option has been installed System Setup Clear Setting All Settings Fax Setup Copy Setup Scan Setup System Setup Network Setup Address Book Sent Report Fax Rcv Report Job Management Active Job Stored Job File Policy Image Overwrite Immediate On Demand Network TCP IP IPv4 DHCP BOOTP Static IP Address Primary DNS Secondary DNS TCP IP IPv6 IPv6 Activate DHCPv6 Config Ethernet Speed Auto 10M Half 10M Full 100M Half 10
27. e Network Scanner Select when your machine is connected via network port Auto detection on the network Automatically detects your machine IP or Host name Enter in your machine s IP address or host name to detect your machine Scan Assistant You can scan by pressing Samsung Scan and Fax Manager gt Quick Scan The Scan Assistant window allows you to adjust scan settings and start the scanning process e Favorites Allows you to save the current preferences settings for future use When you save Favorites all current scan settings are saved To use a saved setting select it from the Favorites drop down list The machine is now set to scan according to the setting you selected To delete saved setting select it from the Favorites drop down list and click Delete To set a favorite as startup select the favorite you want to set as startup then click the Set as default button e Scan sttings The following scan options are available Image Type Allows you to chose the proper color settings for image scanning Resolution Allows you to choose the image resolution Document Size Allows you to choose the proper size of the scanned image Document Source Allows you to choose the device document feeder or scan glass you want to scan with Prompt for additional pages If this check box is checked you can scan pages continuously This option is useful when you scan multipage documents and or when Document Source
28. gt Security Options gt Network access Sharing and security model for local accounts e Ifthe setting is not Classic local users authenticate as themselves change it to Classic local users authenticate as themselves No Question Answer 1 When try to open the When the Custom utility opens the CONFIG CIS3 script file config ci3 script file it checks the files doesn t open and manufacture model and script file a warning message pops type Check the lt MFG gt lt MDL gt node Up of the file you want to open and if sSCRIPT TYPE value is Config 2 cannot precede the next It checks if the IP address hostname step at Search Network is valid or not You can specify only Printer dialog the P address hostname which is connected via network currently Check the connection status of the printer to specify 3 When execute the If you want to install as silent mode customized installer package the welcome dialog appears and need to select the options again check the Install the package as silent mode check box in the Summary window Cannot access error message appears during domain workgroup remote installation Check if the C drive folder is shared C Drive folder should be shared as C to access remote client computers Administrator s Guide Windows only 7 contact samsung worldwide lf you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products c
29. icon a display window will pop up 16 For Mac OS X 10 3 select the IP Printing tab For Mac OS X 10 4 click IP Printer For Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 click IP 17 Select Socket HP Jet Direct in Printer Type When printing a document containing many pages printing performance may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer Type option 18 Enter the machine s IP address in the Printer Address field 19 Enter the queue name in the Queue Name field If you cannot determine the queue name for your machine server try using the default queue first 20 For Mac OS X 10 3 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop For Mac OS X 10 4 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model For Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 if Auto Select does not work properly select Select a driver to use and your machine name in Print Using Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the default machine 21 Click Add iY If the printer driver does not work properly uninstall the driver and reinstall it Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh a Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on b Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive c Double click CD ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop d
30. nd or Commands not to set the It indicates installed ND installed driver as a default machine driver will not be machine driver the default machine driver on your system if there are one or more printer drivers installed If there is no installed machine driver on your system then this option won t be applied because Windows OS will set installed printer driver as a default machine driver x or Uses existing machine This command provides a IX driver files to create printer way to install a printer instance if it is already installed instance that uses installed printer driver files without installing an additional driver up sprinter Removes only specified This command provides a name gt or printer instance and not the way to remove only UP lt printer driver files specified printer instance name gt from your system without effecting other printer drivers It will not remove printer driver files from your system d or Uninstalls all device drivers This command will remove D and applications from your all installed device drivers system and application software from your system v lt share Shares installed machine It will install all supported name gt or and add other available Windows OS platform s V lt share platform drivers for Point amp machine drivers to system name gt Print and share it with specified lt shar
31. you can scan to the device using the default settings or you can customize your own scan settings When you scan a document the machine uses the default settings such as the resolution You can also customize your own scan setting If your USB memory device has certain features example security key security partition booting disk password settings and so forth do not use the USB memory device with your machine The files stored in the USB memory device may be corrupted or the machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see device s User s Guide Scanning 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass 3 Press gt Scan Email and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Scan To USB and press OK Your machine begins scanning the original and then asks if you want to scan another page 5 Toscan another page press the left right arrow to highlight Yes and press OK Load an original and press Start Otherwise press the left right arrow to highlight No and press OK 6 After scanning is complete you can remove the USB memory device from the machine Customizing scan to USB You can specify image size file format or color mode for each scanning to USB job 1 Press gt Scan Email on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel
32. 194 AAAA A is the hexadecimal 0 through 9 A through F 8 Click the Apply button Installing printer driver Driver installation for network printer in IPv6 network environment is same as TCP IPv4 See Installing network connected machine s driver on page 3 Select TCP IP Port and when the list of machines are displayed simply select your machine s IPv6 address Connecting SyncThru Web Service 1 2 3 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website A log in page appears Type in the ID and Password then click Login If it s your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service type in the below default ID and password ID admin Password sec00000 Select one of the IPv6 addresses Link local Address Stateless Address Stateful Address Manual Address from Network Configuration Report Enter the IPv6 addresses ex http FE80 215 99FF FE66 7701 A Address must be enclosed in brackets Network setup 7 basic setup After installation is complete you may want to set the machine s default settings Refer to the next section if you would like to set or change values This chapter gives you step by step instructions for setting up the machine This chapter includes e Altitude adjustment e Changing the display langua
33. 2008 Vista press Properties For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 from context menus select the Printer properties iY If Printer properties item has mark you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer 6 Select the Sharing tab 7 Check the Change Sharing Options 8 Check the Share this printer 9 Fill in the Share Name field Click OK Setting up a client computer 1 Install your printer driver See Installing USB connected machine s driver on page 3 2 Click the Windows Start menu 3 Select All programs gt Accessories gt Window Explorer 4 Enter in the IP address of the host computer and press Enter IZ In case host computer requires User name and Password fill in User ID and password of the host computer account 5 Right click the printer icon you want to share and select Connect 6 When the set up complete message appears click OK 7 Open the file you want to print and start printing Macintosh The following steps are for Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 Refer to Mac Help for other OS versions Setting up a host computer 1 Install your printer driver See Macintosh on page 4 Macintosh on page 5 2 Open the Applications folder gt System Preferences and click Print amp Fax 3 Select the printer to share in the Printer List 4 Select Share this printer Setting up a client computer 1 Install your printer driver See Installing USB connected machine s driver on page 3
34. 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode ole G9 PO Setting the color report This menu allows you to print reports in color Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Color Report and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight On and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode O KIT O OS Setting the default tray and paper You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing job Wide A4 is useful when printing in DOS mode This option prints 80 charactors in a line which printing 78 charactors in a line is usual in DOS mode In the control panel Setting the paper size 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Paper Setup and press OK Basic setup 3 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Paper Size and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow to select the paper tray you want and press OK 6 Press the up down arrow to select the paper size you want 7 Press OK to save the selection 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Setting the paper type 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Paper Setup and press OK 4 Press
35. AB57 CCC MUHCBA3M Poccuu Fax Branding The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the following information 1 the date and time of transmission 2 identification of either business business entity or individual sending the message and 3 telephone number of either the sending machine business business entity or individual The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68 If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities or require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment or otherwise materially affect its use or performance the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service Ringer Equivalence Number The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine In some instances you may need to
36. Changing the copy setup options For copy output you can set up several options in advance 1 Press KS Copy on the control panel 2 Press Menu on the control panel 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Copy Setup and press OK Machine status and advanced feature_ 2 4 Press the up down arrow until the copy setup item you want is highlighted and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow until the setup option you want is highlighted and press OK 6 Press the up down arrow until the setting you want is highlighted and press OK 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 as needed 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Change default Option Description Scan Size Sets the image size YH The scan size options may vary between document feeder or scanner glass of Copies You can enter the number of copies using the number keypad Collation Collation is a process of printing a multiple copy job in sets Reduce Enlarge Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image Darkness Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is easier to read when the original contains faint markings and dark images Original Type Improves the copy quality by selecting the document type for the current copy job Scan setup Changing the scan setup options To avoid having to customize the scan settings for each job you can set up default scan settings for each scan type 1 Press gt Scan Email on the
37. Double click the MAC Installer folder e Double click the Installer OS X icon f Enter the password and click OK g The Samsung Installer window opens Click Continue h Select Uninstall and click Uninstall i When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears Click Continue j When the uninstall is done click Quit Linux Install Linux Driver 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on Also your machine s IP address should have been set 2 From the Samsung website download the Unified Linux Driver package to your computer 3 Right click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the package 4 Double click cdroot gt autorun 5 The Samsung Installer window opens Click Continue 6 The Add printer wizard window opens Click Next 7 Select Network printer and click Search button 8 The Printer s IP address and model name appears on list field 9 Select your machine and click Next 10 Input the printer description and Next 11 When the add printer is done click Finish 12 When the install is done click Finish Add network Printer 1 Double click the Unified Driver Configurator 2 Click Add Printer 3 The Add printer wizard window opens Click Next 4 Select Network printer and click the Search button 5 The printer s IP address and model name appears on list field 6 Select your machine and click Next 7 Input the printer description and N
38. Enter the password and click OK The Samsung Installer window opens Click Continue Read the license agreement and click Continue Click Agree to agree to the license agreement Select Easy Install and click Install Easy Install is recommended for most users All components necessary for machine operations will be installed If you select Custom Install you can choose individual components to Getting started_ 4 install 11 When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears click Continue 12 Select Typical installation for a local printer and then click OK iH If you select Typical installation for a network printer during the machine driver installation the SetIP program automatically runs If the machine has already configured network infomation close the SetIP program Go to the next step 13 After the installation is finished click Quit 14 Open the Applications folder 5 Utilities 5 Print Setup Utility For Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 open the Applications folder gt System Preferences and click Print 8 Fax 15 Click Add on the Printer List For Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 click the icon a display window will pop Up 16 For Mac OS X 10 3 select the USB tab For Mac OS X10 4 click Default Browser and find the USB connection For Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 click Default and find the USB connection 17 For Mac OS X 10 3 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung
39. Installer If necessary select a language from the drop down list 4 Read License Agreement and select accept the terms of the License Agreement Then click Next 5 Select Package Type window appears Select Modify Script If you place the mouse cursor over the package type you can see the detailed information on the bottom right side of the window 6 Open the script file you want to modify ex CONFIG CI3 CONFIG CI3 script file will exist in Setup Script subfolder of the created setup package 7 Select Printer connection window appears Select the printer connection type and click Next elf you selected Network Connection Search Network Printers window appears type in the IP address or host name in the information field than click Search when you are finished click Next The discovered printer list will show network printers on the same subnet If you want to specify a network printer that is located over subnet then specify IP address of network printer directly iH elf you can t search network printers on the network then check whether your firewall setting is disabled If it is enabled disable firewall temporarily and try searching again Setup configuration script filename is set as CONFIG CI3 and it s not changeable 8 Set Printer Drivers window appears Click Next If necessary configure printer name sharing shared name and default printer setting If you changed settings then you should click Ap
40. Office click Help gt SmarThru Office help The SmarThru Office Help window appears you can view on screen help supplied on the SmarThru program 13 Click the SmarThru icon in the tray area of the Windows taskbar to activate the SmarThru Office launcher g Follow the steps below to uninstall SmarThru Office Before you begin the uninstall ensure that all applications are closed on your computer a From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs b Select SmarThru Office and then select Uninstall SmarThru Office c When your computer asks you to confirm your selection read the statement and click OK d Click Finish Using SmarThru Office Scanning 1 Click the SmarThru icon in the tray area of the windows taskbar to activate the SmarThru Office launcher 2 Click the scanning icon to open the scanning window Management tools 3 3 Scan Setting window opens Sample Image Select Allows you to select between the Local or Network 1 Scanner scanner Select Allows you to save settings frequently used for 2 Profile future use Click New Profile to save the setting Scan Allows you to customize settings for Scan Size 3 Settings and Paper Source Scan To Allows you to customize settings for File Name 4 and location to send scanned data Click Advanced button to set more scan options 4 Set scan settings and click Scan Printing 1 Click the SmarThru icon in the t
41. Please read the License Agreement 3 Searching Printers i License Language English 4 Installation EEE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS SOFTWARE 5 Finish PRODUCT IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This Samsung Electronics End User License Agreement EULA is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and Samsung Electronics Co Ltd SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS with respect to the SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS product identified above The SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS software product may include associated software components media printed materials and online or electronic documentation SOFTWARE PRODUCT By installing copying downloading or using the SOFTWARE PRODUCT you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA If you do not agree to the terms of this EULA you may not install or use the SOFTWARE PRODUCT The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is protected by both copyright law and computer program protection laws 1 GRANT OF LICENSE Samsung grants you only the number of license that you purchase for using the software You cannot modify the Software or disable any licensing or control features of the Software le web Kaka RB me To Ne wee dl Lan mam eee ctw man a maa ek mee ween blew bibo MIT accept the terms of the License Agreement The program searches for the machine Y If your machine is not found in the network or locally the following window will appear o 1 Welcome 2 Li
42. Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive Click OK elf you use Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start gt All programs gt Accessories gt Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive and click OK elf the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control windows elf the AutoPlay window appears in Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Yes in the User Account Control windows 3 Select Administrator Installation gt Remote Installation If necessary select a language from the drop down list 4 Read License Agreement and select accept the terms of the License Agreement Then click Next 5 Select Client Group window appears 6 Click New Group To use remote installation you need at least a group If you have already created a group load the group you want and go to step 16 eEdit Group You can edit groups eLoad Group You can load groups Delete Group You can delete groups 7 Log on window appears Select Workgroup Remote Installation and type in the Workgroup ID and Password Z For Windows XP 2000 2003 the ID should be of a member of Administrators group for operating computers and for Windows Vista 2008 7 the ID should be of the
43. Search when you are finished click Next The discovered printer list will show network printers on the same subnet If you want to specify a network printer that is located over subnet then specify IP address of network printer directly 14 Confirm Group details window appears Check the group information and click Next Location to save the group shows the path of default folder which stores the created group information The group information file will be created as lt group_name gt RGI You can change the path by clicking the Change button 15 Select Client Group window appears again 16 Select the group s and click Next to start remote installation Remote installation begins you can see the installation status from the window 17 When installation is completed Results of remote installation window appears Check the result For failed client computers you can reinstall again by clicking the Reinstall button iY For failed client computers you can check the log file which is created in the client computers Administrator s Guide Windows only 2 Error log messages Message Meaning Suggested solutions Connection Unable to bind the socket Restart the client Error Port number computer Unable to listen the socket Port number Unable to connect to the client computer Client computer s socket is closed Setup Error Unable to access the default shared fo
44. Server R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue or Yes in the User Account Control windows Network setup_ 3 3 Select Install now lt r 9 Install Now O view User s Guide P Advanced Installation Administrator Installation Installation Language English If necessary select a language from the drop down list i For CLX 6250 Series installation window you can see Wireless Setting and Installation menu You can use this menu if an optional wireless network card is installed and or the machine is connected to your computer with a USB cable Install the optional wireless network card Instructions for Wireless Setting and Installation refer to the wireless network installation guide provided with the optional wireless network card The Advanced Installation has two options Custom Installation and Install Software Only Custom Installation allows you to select the machine s connection and choose individual component to install Install Software Only allows you to install the supplied software such as Smart Panel Follow the guide in the window eAdministrator Installation provides convenient installation methods useful for administrators See Administrator s Guide Windows only on page 1 4 Read License Agreement and select accept the terms of the License Agreement Then click Next gt L Welcome Maa unsa Agreement 24icense Agreement
45. Sheet H Layout Direction fal 5 MM N Border Nona H Teo Sided Of Reverse Page Orientation T Pore Supplies 3 Select the other options you want to use 4 Click Print then machine prints the selected number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper Printing on both sides of paper You can print on both sides of the paper Before printing in the duplex mode decide on which edge you will be binding your finished document The binding options are as follows e Long Edge Binding This option is the conventional layout used in book binding Short Edge Binding This option is the type often used with calendars From your Macintosh application select Print from the File menu Select Layout from the drop down list under Orientation Select a binding orientation from Two Sided Printing option Select the other options you want to use Click Print then the machine prints the selected number of pages on a side of a paper ae oN Printer na a Presets Standard H Copies i A Collated O Two Sided Pages all j i i O Frem 1 to 1 Paper Sire AA bad 20 99 by 20 70 em Oriengation Ma NG Layout aj Pages perSheet 2 Layout Direction if S Val Border H Two Sida Long edge binding Short edqe binding Cancel ind rE a C PoF Supplies A If you print more than 2 copies the last page of the first copy and the first page of the second copy m
46. Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF Regulatory information_ 8 SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson th cryptsoft com Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code
47. Xsane plug in package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home page For the detailed information refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front end application If you wish to use another kind of scan application refer to application s Help encounter error Cannot open port device file when printing a document Avoid changing print job parameters via LPR GUI for example while a print job is in progress Known versions of CUPS Common UNIX Printing System server break the print job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning Since Unified Linux Driver locks the port while printing the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and unavailable for subsequent print jobs If this situation occurs try to release the port by selecting Release port in Port configuration window Troubleshooting_ 21 condition Suggested solutions Common Macintosh problems The machine does not appear on the scanners list Ensure your machine is attached to your computer connected properly via the USB port and is turned on Ensure the scanner driver for your machine is installed in your system Open Unified Linux Driver configurator switch to Scanners configuration then press Drivers Make sure that driver with a name corresponding to your machine s name is listed in the window Ensure the port is not busy Since functional
48. You can specify the number of times the machine rings before answering an incoming call Machine status and advanced feature 1 Option Description Stamp RCV Name This option allows the machine to automatically print the page number and the date and time of reception at the bottom of each page of a received fax Rev Start Code This code allows you to initiate fax reception from an extension phone plugged into the EXT socket on the back of the machine If you pick up the extension phone and hear fax tones enter the code It is preset to 9 at the factory Auto Reduction When receiving a fax containing pages as long as or longer than the paper loaded in the paper tray the machine can reduce the size of the Original to fit the size of the paper loaded in the machine Turn on this feature if you want to automatically reduce an incoming page With this feature set to Off the machine cannot reduce the original to fit onto one page The original will be divided and printed in actual size on two or more pages Discard Size When receiving a fax containing pages as long as or longer than the paper in your machine you can set the machine to discard a specific length from the end of the received fax The machine will print the received fax on one or more sheets of paper minus the data that would have been on the specified discard segment When the received fax contains pages larger than the paper
49. amp fuse in the plug adaptor or at the distribution board Regulatory information_ 6 Declaration of Conformity European Countries CE Approvals and Certifications The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable 93 68 EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated Hereby Samsung Electronics declare that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www samsung com printer go to Support gt Download center and enter your printer MFP name to browse the EuDoC January 1 1995 Council Directive 2006 95 EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment January 1 1996 Council Directive 2004 108 EC 92 31 EEC approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility March 9 1999 Council Directive 1999 5 EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity A full declaration defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co Ltd representative EC Certification Certification to 1999 5 EC Radio Equipment amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive FAX This Samsung product has been self certified by
50. and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Receiving and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Receive Mode and press OK Press the up down arrow until the fax reception mode you want highlights eFax Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax reception mode eTel Receives a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and then Start eAns Fax Is for when an answering machine attached to your machine Your machine answers an incoming call and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax DRPD you can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD feature Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers For further details see Receiving faxes using DRPD mode on page 5 oe eh This setting may not be available depending on your country 7 Press OK to save your selection 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode iY eTo use the Ans Fax mode attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on the back of your machine elf you do not want other people to view your received documents you can use secure receiving mode In this mode all of the received faxes are stored in memory For further details see Receiving in secure receiving mode on page 5 Re
51. arrow until the file you want to delete highlights and press OK 6 To delete file press the up down arrow to highlight Yes and press OK 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Formatting a USB memory device 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine Press Direct USB on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight File Manage and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Format and press OK To format USB memory device Press the up down arrow to highlight Yes and press OK 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode i GA BO Viewing the USB memory status 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine 2 Press Direct USB on the control panel 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Check Space and press OK The available memory space appears on the display 4 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Using USB memory device 3 machine status and advanced feature This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine and the method of setting for the advanced machine setup Read this chapter carefully in order to use your machine s diverse features This chapter includes e Fax setup e Copy setup e Scan setup e Printing a report Clearing memory Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Fax setup e Network e Document management
52. be a copying or printing job in progress Try your job again when that job is finished The selected port is currently being used Restart your computer and try again The machine printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on then restart your computer The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off The incoming fax has blank spaces or is of poor quality The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty A noisy phone line can cause line errors Check your machine by making a copy A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life Replace the toner cartridge See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 Some of the words on an incoming fax are stretched The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam There are lines on the originals you sent Check your scan unit for marks and clean it See Cleaning the scan unit on page 3 Troubleshooting_ 19 condition suggested solutions The machine dials a number but the connection with the other fax machine fails The other fax machine may be turned off out of paper or cannot answer incoming calls Speak with the other machine operator and ask them to solve the problem on their side Problem
53. called machine ports The current status of any machine port can be viewed via the Ports configuration The port sharing prevents you from accessing one functional block of the machine device while another block is in use When you install a new machine device onto your system it is strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an Unified Driver Configurator In this case you will be asked to choose I O port for the new device This choice will provide the most suitable configuration for machine s functionality For machine scanners I O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers automatically so proper settings are applied by default Management tools 6 maintenance This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge This chapter includes Printing a machine report Monitoring the supplies life Adjusting the color contrast Finding the serial number Printing a machine report You can print the machine s information and job report 1 2 3 4 Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Report and press OK Press the up down arrow until the report or list you want to print appears and press OK To print all reports and lists select All Reports Press the left right arrow to highlight Yes at the Printing prompt and press OK You can use SyncThru Web Service to print th
54. default administrator account named Administrator eYou can also use Domain Remote Installation See Domain remote installation on page 1 8 Click Next 9 Select Clients window appears 10 Type in the group name in the Group Name field 11 Add the client computers to be in the group to the right side panel iY eYou can click button to search the client computers and add button to add the client computer by typing the IP address or the computer name of client eYou can add up to 50 client computers in a group If you want to add more than 50 client computers you need to create more groups elf the firewall is enabled on the client computer access may be denied The client computer s operating system should be Windows 2000 or higher elf you have grouped the client computers in a workgroup and you try to connect to the client computer a pop up window asking you to enter an Administrator s ID password of the client computer you selected will appear if you can t access through the password you set in step 7 eC drive must be shared as C 12 Select Software and Utilities to Install window appears Select the driver s and application software s you want to install and click Next 13 Select Printer connection window appears Select the printer connection type and click Next elf you selected Network Connection Search Network Printers window appears type in the IP address or host name in the information field than click
55. driver are available for scanning documents on your machine Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing Samsung Scan and Fax Manager You can find out about scan and fax manager program information and installed scan driver s condition Printer Settings Utility This program allows you to set up printer s other options from your computer desktop SetIP Use this program to set your machine s TCP IP addresses Linux Unified Linux Driver Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine s features PostScript Printer Driver Use this driver to run your machine from a Linux computer and print documents PostScript printer description file is included SANE Use this driver to scan documents Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing Printer Settings Utility This program allows you to set up printer s other options from your computer desktop SetIP Use this program to set your machine s TCP IP addresses UNIX UNIX Printer Driver Use this driver to print documents from the UNIX system a Allows you to edit a scanned image in various ways using a powerful image editor and to send the image by email You can also open another image editor program such as Adobe Photoshop from SmarThru Office For details refer to the on screen help supplied on t
56. driver name gt Smart Panel 2 Click Printer Setting 3 Click Setting gt Altitude Adjustment Select the appropriate value from the dropdown list and then click Apply Z If your machine is connected to a network SyncThru Web Service screen appears automatically Click Settings gt Machine Settings gt e Setting job timeout e Auto continue e Paper substitution e Net accounting e Setting the color report e Setting the default tray and paper e Changing the font setting System gt Setup gt Altitude Ad Select the appropriate altitude value and then click Apply If it s your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service type in the below default ID and password ID admin Password sec00000 Changing the display language To change the language that appears on the display follow the steps below Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Language and press OK Press the up down arrow to display the language you want Press OK to save the selection Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode oo se SN gt Setting the date and time When you set the time and date they are used in delay fax and delay print They are printed on reports If however they are not correct you need to correct it to the present date and time K If the mac
57. e Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared Curl AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc GE C If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine e Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray e Change the printer option and try again Go to Printing Preferences click Paper tab and set type to Thin See Opening printing preferences on page 2 Toner cartridge produces fewer copies than expected before running out of toner e Your originals may contain pictures solids or heavy lines For example your originals may be forms newsletters books or other documents that use more toner e The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made e Turn the machine off and back on An unknown image repetitively appears on a few sheets or loose toner light print or contamination occurs Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1 000 m 3 281 ft or above The high altitude may affect the print quality such as loose toner or light imaging Change the correct altitude setting to your machine See Altitude adjustment on page 1 Troubleshooting_ 18 Scanning problems Fax problems Condition Suggested solutions condition suggested solutions The scanner does not work Make sure that you place the original to be sc
58. folder e g Scanned Images must be setup on the root and the folder properties need to be setup as a share with you listed as having user rights to the folder 16 Click Apply Scanning and sending to SMB FTP server 1 Make sure that your machine is connected to a network 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass 3 Press gt Scan Email on the control panel 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Scan To SMB or Scan To FTP and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow to highlight the server and file share required then press OK 6 Press the up down arrow until the scan format you want is highlighted and press OK The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the specified server Setting authentication for authorized user If you have connected your machine to a network and set up the network parameters correctly you can scan and send images over the network To send a scanned image through email or via network server safely you must register account information of authorized users to your local machine using SyncThru Web Service Registering local authorized users Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in your web browser Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service Click Security gt User Access Control gt User Authentication Select Local Authenticatio
59. heat resistant ink that will not melt vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine s fusing temperature for 0 1 second Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature about 170 C 338 F Letterhead Preprinted paper ink must be non flammable and should not adversely affect machine rollers Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage Before you load letterhead preprinted paper verify that the ink on the paper is dry During the fusing process wet ink can come off preprinted paper reducing print quality Used paper When loading used paper printed side should be facing up with an uncurled edge at the front If you experience problems with paper feed turn the paper around Note that print quality is not guaranteed Sf 4 e Used paper must be printed with heat resistant ink that will not melt vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the Media and tray_ 6 machine s fusing temperature for 0 1 second Check your machine s specification to view the fusing temperature about 170 C 338 F e Used paper ink must be non flammable and should not adversely affect machine rollers e Before you load used paper verify that the ink on the paper is dry During the fusing process wet ink can come off used paper reducing print quality Photo e Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper w
60. highlights and press OK To print all reports and lists select All Reports 5 Press OK when Yes appears to confirm printing The selected information prints out Option Description Configuration This list shows the status of the user selectable options You may print this list to confirm your changes after changing settings Supplies Info This item allows you to check how many pages are printed and how much toner are left in the cartridge Address Book This list shows all of the email addresses currently stored in the machine s memory Send Report This report shows the fax number the number of pages the elapsed time of the job the communication mode and the communication results for a particular fax job You can set up your machine to automatically print a transmission confirmation report after each fax job See Sending on page 1 Sent Report This report shows information on the faxes and emails you have recently sent You can set the machine to automatically print this report every 50 communications See Sending on page 1 Fax Rcv Report This report shows information on the faxes you have recently received Scheduled Jobs This list shows the documents currently stored for delayed faxes along with the starting time and type of each operation JunkFax Report This list shows the fax numbers specified as junk fax numbers To add or delete numbers to or from
61. in Mac OS X Linux Click this icon in Linux Or if you are a Windows user you can launch it from the Start menu select Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt your machine name gt Smart Panel Z elf you have already installed more than one Samsung machine first select the correct machine model you want in order to access the corresponding Smart Panel Right click in Windows or Linux or click in Mac OS X the Smart Panel icon and select your machine The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this user s guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the machine the estimated level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge s and various other types of information You can also change settings Ga Meany 8 Buy Now 2 F User s Guide 3 N aprio Setting gggoiwe Setting 5 Toner Level View the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge s The machine and the number of toner 1 cartridge s shown in the above window may differ depending on the machine in use Some machines do not have this feature Order replacement toner cartridge s online 2 Buy Now User s Guide View User s Guide IZ This button changes to Troubleshooting Guide when error occurs You can directly open troubleshooting section in the user s guide Printer Configure various machine settings in the Prin
62. in the Type drop down list 3 Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet 2 4 6 9 or 16 in the Pages per Side drop down list 4 Select the page order from the Page Order drop down list if necessary 5 Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet 6 Click the Paper tab select the Size Source and Type 7 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Printing posters This feature allows you to print a single page document onto 4 9 or 16 sheets of paper for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster size document AP Gab CNS A 3x3 Printing_ 3 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 Click the Basic tab select Poster Printing in the Type drop domn list 3 Select the page layout you want Specification of the page layout ePoster 2x2 Document will be enlarged and be divided into 4 pages ePoster 3x3 Document will be enlarged and be divided into 9 pages ePoster 4x4 Document will be enlarged and be divided into 16 pages 4 Select the Poster Overlap value Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to make it easier to paste the sheets together ab s410 mm NG LA 10 mm 5 XS the 4 tab select the Size Source and Type 6 Click OK or Print until you exit
63. in your machine and Auto Reduction has been turned on the machine will reduce the fax to fit on the existing paper and nothing will be discarded Junk Fax Setup This setting may not be available depending on your country Using this feature the system will not accept faxes sent from remote stations whose numbers are stored in the memory as junk fax numbers This feature is useful for blocking any unwanted faxes When you turn on this feature you can access the following options to set junk fax numbers e Add Allows you to set up to 10 fax numbers e Delete Allows you to delete the desired junk fax number If you select Delete All Allows you to delete all junk fax numbers DRPD Mode This setting may not be available depending on your country This mode enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers In this menu you can set the machine to recognize which ring patterns to answer For details about this feature see Receiving faxes using DRPD mode on page 5 Duplex Print Set this duplex feature to save paper When the machine prints the received fax data it prints them on both sides of the paper For details about this feature see Printing received faxes on both sides of the paper on page 5 Option Description Doc Box Saving This menu only appears when an optional hard disk drive HDD has been installed With this feature se
64. in your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label If the country you will be using the wireless device in is not listed contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be allowed The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time Because the wireless devices which may be embedded into your printer emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use Regardless of the power levels care should be taken to minimize human contact during normal operation As a general guideline a separation of 20 cm 8 inches between the wireless device and the body for use of a wireless device near the body this does not include extremities is typical This device should be used more than 20 cm 8 inches from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices Examples of common restrictions are listed below Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft Current aviation regulations require wireless devices to be turned o
65. installation package as a silent installation package Silent installation installs the driver automatically by the set option without user intervention When creating the setup package is finished Packaging Completed window appears Check Open package folder upon completion if you want the created package to open automatically after it s created Click Finish Modifying a setup script file 1 2 Make sure that the machine is connected to the network or USB and powered on Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive eThe software CD should automatically run and an installation window appears elf the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive Click OK Administrator s Guide Windows only 4 elf you use Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start gt All programs gt Accessories gt Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive and click OK elf the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control windows elf the AutoPlay window appears in Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Yes in the User Account Control windows 3 Select Administrator Installation gt Create Customized
66. is available for the download Canceling a print job If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler cancel the job as follows 1 Click the Windows Start menu 2 For Windows 2000 select Settings gt Printers For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes For Windows 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers 3 For Windows 2000 XP 2003 Vista and 2008 double click your machine For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 right click your printer icon gt context menus gt See what s printing iY If See what s printing item has B mark you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer 4 From the Document menu select Cancel fH You can also access this window by simply double clicking the machine icon in the Windows task bar You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop Clear on the control panel Opening printing preferences You can preview the settings you selected on the upper right of the Printing Preferences fH The following windows may differ depending on your operating system printer models or the application you are using 1 Open the document you want to print 2 Select Print from the file menu The Print window appears 3 Select your ma
67. is saved in computer s My Documents gt My Pictures gt Samsung folder eYou can use Twain driver to scan quickly in using the Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program eYou can also scan by pressing Window s Start gt Control Panel gt Scanning 3 Samsung Scan and Fax Manager gt Quick Scan Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to server You can scan an image and send it to a total of five destinations via the SMB or FTP Setting up an FTP server To use an FTP server you need to set up parameters to access the FTP servers using SyncThru Web Service 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a your web browser 3 Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website A log in page appears 5 Type in the ID and Password then click Login If it s your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service type in the below default ID and password ID admin Password sec00000 Click Address Book gt Individual Click Add Check the box next to Add FTP Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name 0 Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 21 11 Check the box next to Anonymous if you want the FTP server to permit access to unauthorized people This box is unchecked by default 12 Enter the Login Name and Pa
68. is securely closed AN If the front door is not completely closed the machine will not operate Replacing the paper transfer belt After the life span of the paper transfer belt is complete you have to replace it e The transfer belt related message appears on the display telling it s time for a replacement e The Smart Panel program window appears on the computer telling you the paper transfer belt needs to be replaced l4 The life span of the paper transfer belt may be affected by operating environment printing interval media type and media size 1 Open the front door A If you leave the front door open for more than a few minutes the OPC drum in the toner cartridge can be exposed to light This will cause damage to the OPC drum Close the front door should the installation need to be halted for any reason 2 Press the green release handle to release the paper transfer belt Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt lift it out of the machine 3 Remove a new paper transfer belt from its bag 4 Remove the paper covering the paper transfer belt A eDo not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the paper transfer belt package You could damage the surface of Supplies and accessories_ 3 the paper transfer belt eBe careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt 5 Holding the handle on the new paper transfer belt align it with the slots on the inside of the f
69. is set to Flatbed platen glass In this case a sequence of scanned images is processed as a single document Pages to Scan Allows you to specify how many pages are to be scanned This option is available when Document Source is set to ADF Document feeder e Preference The following scan options are available Auto crop image after preview If this option is checked the scanning area will be automatically adjusted to the image size Preview on program start If this option is checked the scanning area will be selected automatically as shown in the preview Blank page detection This operation automatically detects whether the scanned image is blank or not Delete page Blank pages will be deleted at the end of the scanning process Separate files Blank page will work as a scan job separator That is when multiple pages are scanned at once a blank page will divide scanned image sequence into parts Each part will be treated as a separate document group Start from scanner If this option is checked scanning process is managed using scanner touch screen rather than from the computer The option is not available for some scanner models e Advanced In the Advanced mode additional options such as Image Adjustment Image Enhancement and Additional Settings are available Image Adjustment Allows you to perform some transformations of the scanned image These transformations include automatic adjustment of image siz
70. latin HONDURAS 800 7919267 www samsung com latin HONG KONG 3698 4698 www samsung com hk www samsung com hk_e n HUNGARY 06 80 SAMSUNG www samsung com hu 726 7864 INDIA 3030 8282 www samsung com in 1800 110011 1800 3000 8282 INDONESIA 0800 112 8888 www samsung com id ITALIA 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung comiit JAMAICA 1 800 234 7267 www samsung com latin JAPAN 0120 327 527 www samsung com jp LATVIA 8000 7267 www samsung com lv LITHUANIA 8 800 77777 www samsung com lt LUXEMBURG 02 261 03 710 www samsung com lu MALAYSIA 1800 88 9999 www samsung com my MEXICO 01 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com mx 726 7864 MOLDOVA 00 800 500 55 500 www samsung ua www samsung com ua_r U NETHERLANDS 0900 SAMSUNG www samsung com nl 0900 7267864 0 10 min NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG 0800 726 www samsung com nz 786 NICARAGUA 00 1800 5077267 www samsung com latin NORWAY 3 SAMSUNG 7267864 www samsung com no PANAMA 800 7267 www samsung com latin PHILIPPINES 1800 10 SAMSUNG www samsung com ph 726 7864 1 800 3 SAMSUNG 726 7864 1 800 8 SAMSUNG 726 7864 02 5805777 POLAND 0 801 1SAMSUNG www samsung com pl 172678 022 607 93 33 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 1 Country Regio n Customer Care Center Web Site PORTUGAL 80820 SAMSUNG www samsung com pt 726 7864 PUERTO RICO 1 800 682 3180 www samsung com latin REP DOMINICA 1 800 751 2676 www samsung com latin EIRE 0818 717 100 www s
71. not be printed elf you press Stop Clear the machine cancles the copy job and returns to ready mode Deciding the form of copy output You can set the machine to sort the copy job For example if you make 2 copies of a 3 page original one complete 3 page document will print followed by a second complete document 1 Press SF Copy on the control panel 2 Place originals face up in the document feeder Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the scanner lid Press OK and enter the number of copies using the number keypad Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Copy Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Change Default and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Collation and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight On and press OK ONO Aw Copying_ 2 On Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals 1 1 1 9 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode 10 Press Start to begin copying One complete document will print followed by the second complete document 2 up or 4 up copying N up The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4 pages onto one sheet of paper 2 or 4 up copying is available only when you load originals into the document feeder 1 Press KS
72. not connected properly Plug in the power cord and then press the power switch to turn the machine on Disconnect the machine printer cable and reconnect it For Local USB Condition Suggested solutions Paper jams during printing Clear the paper jam See Clearing paper jams on page 3 Paper sticks together Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray See Print media specifications on page 3 Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper See Print media specifications on page 3 Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together install paper from a fresh ream Multiple sheets of paper do not feed Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray Load paper of only one type size and weight Paper does not feed into the machine Remove any obstructions from inside the machine Paper has not been loaded correctly Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly There is too much paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray The paper is too thick Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine See Print media specifications on page 3 If an original does not feed into the machine the document feeder rubber pad may require to be replaced Contact a service representative The paper keeps jamming There is too much
73. number of copies to be printed or enter the number 6 Press OK or Start to start printing the selected file After printing the file the display asks if you want to print another job 7 To print another document press the left right arrow to highlight Yes and press OK Repeat from step 3 Otherwise press the left right arrow to highlight No and press OK 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Backing up data Data in the machine s memory can be accidentally erased due to power failure or storage failure Backup helps you protect your Address Book entries and the system settings by storing them as backup files on a USB memory device Backing up data 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Export Setting and press OK Press the up down arrow until the option you want is highlighted Address Book Backs up all Address Book entries Setup Data Backs up all system settings 7 Press OK to begin backing up the data The data is backed up to the USB memory 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode O Co INO Restoring data 1 Insert a USB memory device on which the backup data is stored in to the USB memory port Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight
74. of 80 g m2 20 Ibs e 100 sheets of 80 g m2 20 Ibs bond US Folio 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 inches bond for tray A4 210 x 297 mm 8 27 x 11 69 inches e 500 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ibs ua bond for optional tray Oficio 216 x 343 mm 8 5 x 13 5 inches JIS B5 182 x 257 mm 7 17 x 10 12 inches 70 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ib bond ISO B5 176 x 250 mm 6 93 x 9 84 inches e 250 sheets of 80 g m2 20 Ibs Executive 184 x 267 mm 7 25 x 10 5 inches bond A5 148 x210 mm 5 83 x 8 27 inches 70 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ib bond Statement 140 x 216 mm 5 5 x 8 5 inches e 250 sheets of 80 g m2 20 Ibs A6 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 83 inches bond for tray 1 e Not available in optional tray Envelope Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm 3 87 x 7 5 inches Not available in tray1 optional 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ibs bond Envelope No 10 105 x 241 mm 4 12 x 9 5 inches tray 10 sheets Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm 4 33 x 8 66 inches Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm 6 38 x 9 02 inches Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm 4 49 x 6 38 inches Envelope No 9 98 x 225 mm 3 87 x 8 87 inches Envelope 6 3 4 92 x 165 mm 3 62 x 6 5 inches Thick paper Refer to the Plain paper Refer to the Plain paper section 90 to 105 g m 24 to 28 Ibs bond 90 to 105 g m 24 to 28 Ibs bond PACON 250 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ibs 40 sheets bond f or tray1 500 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ibs bond for optional tray Thin paper ales the Plain paper Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 70 g m 16 to 19 Ibs bond 60
75. on to installing network connected machine s driver See Installing network connected machine s driver on page 3 IZ Only use an USB cable no longer then 3 m 10 ft Windows You can install the machine software using the typical or custom method The following steps below are recommended for most users who use a machine directly connected to your computer All components necessary for machine operations will be installed 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on Y If the Found New Hardware Wizard window appears during the installation procedure click Cancel in close the window 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive The software CD should automatically run and an installation window appears elf the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive Click OK elf you use Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start gt All programs gt Accessories gt Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive and click OK elf the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue or Yes in the User Account Control windows 3 Select Install now at 9 Install Now O I7 view User s Guide Advanced I
76. output will appear very different from what it looks like on the screen eRaster Compression This option determines the compression level of images for transferring data from computer to a printer If you set this option to Maximum the printing speed will be high but the printing quality will be low PCL driver only Graphic Controller It allows user to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving readability and align each color channel registration in color printing mode Grayscale Enhancement It allows users to preserve the details of nature photos and improve contrast and readability among gray scaled colors when printing color documents in grayscale PCL driver only Fine Edge It allows users to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving readability Toner Save Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and reduces your cost per page without a significant reduction in print quality 3 Select Apply after completing the settings Adjusting the sharpness and smoothness Screen options This option affect the resolution and clarity of your color output The three screen options are Normal Enhanced and Detailed 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 Click the Graphics tab then select Advanced in Color Mode 3 Select the Matching tab ePrinter default Follows the set value o
77. paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray If you are printing on special materials use the multi purpose tray An incorrect type of paper is being used Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine See Print media specifications on page 3 There may be debris inside the machine Open the front door and remove any debris If an original does not feed into the machine the document feeder rubber pad may need to be replaced Contact a service representative Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes Troubleshooting 13 Printing problems Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions The machine does not print The machine is not receiving power Check the power cord connections Check both power switches and the power source The machine is not selected from the available printers list Select this printers Name from the available printers drop down list in the application you are printing from Check the machine for the following e The front door is not closed Close the front door e Paper is jammed Clear the paper jam See Clearing paper jams on page 3 e No paper is loaded Load paper See Loading paper in the tray on page 3 e The toner cartridge is not installed Install the toner cartridge If a system error occurs contact your service
78. return to ready mode scanning Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer This chapter includes e Basic scanning method e Scanning originals and sending through email Scan to Email e Scanning originals and sending to your computer Scan to PC e Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to server e Setting authentication for authorized user e Using Samsung Scan and Fax Manager e Changing the scan feature settings Z The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various factors including computer speed available disk space memory the size of the image being scanned and bit depth settings Thus depending on your system and what you are scanning you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions especially using enhanced resolution Basic scanning method You can scan the originals with your machine via an USB cable or the network The following methodologies can be used for scanning your documents e Samsung Scan and Fax Manager Scan the originals from the control panel Then the scanned data will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder When you install all the software in the supplied CD the Samsung Scan and Fax Manager is also automatically installed on your computer This feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection See Using Samsung Scan and Fax Manager on page 5 e TW
79. size setting you want is highlighted and press OK 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate 1 Press SG COPY on the control panel 2 Press Menu on the control panel 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Reduce Enlarge and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow to highlight Custom and press OK 6 Press the up down arrow or numeric keypad to enter the copy size you want Pressing and holding the up down arrow allows you to quickly scroll to the number you want 7 Press OK to save the selection 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode When you make a reduced copy black lines may appear at the bottom of your copy Changing the default copy settings The copy options including darkness original type copy size collation and number of copies can be set to those most frequently used When you copy a document the default settings are used unless they have been changed by using the corresponding buttons on the control panel 1 Press KS Copy on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Copy Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Change Default and press OK Press the up down arrow until the setup option you want is highlighted and press OK Press the up down arrow until the setting you want is highlighted and press OK 7 Repeat
80. the USB memory device may be corrupted or the machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see device s User s Guide Direct Print option supported file types e PRN Only files created by provided driver with your machine are compatible PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when you print a document The document will be saved as a PRN file rather than printed on paper Only PRN files created in this fashion can be printed directly from USB memory device See Printing to a file PRN on page 8 Z If you print PRN files created from other machine the printout would be different e BMP BMP Uncompressed e TIFF TIFF 6 0 Baseline e JPEG JPEG Baseline e PDF PDF 1 4 and below To print a document from a USB memory device 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine If one has already been inserted press Direct USB 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight USB Print and press OK Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on it 3 Press the up down arrow until the folder or file you want is highlighted and press OK If you see in the front of a folder name there are one or more files or folders in the selected folder 4 lf you selected a file skip to the next step If you selected a folder press the up down arrow until the file you want is highlighted and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow to select the
81. the control panel 2 Place originals face up in the document feeder Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the scanner lid Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Edge Erase and press OK Press the up down arrow until the binding option you want is highlighted Off Does not use this feature Small Original Erases the edge of the original if it is small Hole Punch Erases the marks of bookbinding holes eBook Center Erases the middle part of the paper which is black and horizontal when you copy a book Border Erase Erases the certain amount of the edge of the printout 7 Press OK 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode 9 Press Start to begin copying O CI a Gray enhance copying When you copy the original in gray scale use this feature for the better quality of copy output This feature is only for the copy in gray scale 1 Press SG COPY on the control panel 2 Place originals face up in the document feeder Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the scanner lid Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Gray Enhance and press OK Press the up down arrow to select On Press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode
82. the lid open Media and tray_ 1 AN eBe careful not to break the scanner glass You may get hurt eDo not put hands while closing the scanner lid The scanner lid may fall on your hands and get hurt eDo not look the light from inside of the scanner while copying or scanning It is harmful to eyes In the document feeder Using the document feeder you can load up to 40 sheets of paper 80 g m 20 Ib bond for one job 1 Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading originals 2 Load the original face up into the document feeder Make sure that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input tray 3 Adjust the document width guides to the paper size l4 Dust on the document feeder glass may cause black lines on the printout Always keep the glass clean See Cleaning the scan unit on page 3 Selecting print media You can print on a variety of print media such as plain paper envelopes labels Always use print media that meet the guidelines for use with your machine Guidelines to select the print media Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user s guide may cause the following problems e Poor print quality e Increased paper jams e Premature wear on the machine Properties such as weight composition grain and moisture content are important factors that affect the machine s perfor
83. the manufacturer System Restoration Kit or contact manufacturer Technical Support for additional information OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2001 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 Thenames OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL
84. the selection Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Pag ee eo Setting job timeout When there is no input for a certain period of time the machine exits the current menu and goes in to the default settings You can set the amount of time the machine will wait 1 Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Job Timeout and press OK Enter the time using up down arrow or numeric keypad Press OK to save the selection Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode ee ee eee Auto continue This is the option to set the machine to continue printing or not in case that the paper size you have set and the paper in the tray mismatches 1 Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Auto Continue and press OK Press the up down arrow until the setting option you want appears On Automatically prints after set time passes when the paper size mismatches the tray paper size eOff Waits until you press Start on the control panel when the paper size mismatches the tray paper size 6 Press OK to save the selection 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode oe INO Paper substitution This option is to pr
85. this list access the Junk Fax Setup menu See Receiving on page 1 Network Info This list shows information on your machine s network connection and configuration Machine status and advanced feature_ 3 Option Description User Auth List This list shows authorized users who are allowed to use the email function PCL Font List You can print the PCL font list PS3 Font List You can print the PS3 font list Accounting Report This is used only when network authentication in enabled with SyncThru Web Service Prints the report of printing out count for each login user Stored Job This list shows the current status of stored job on hard disk drive HDD Completed Job The Completed Job page shows the list of completed print jobs The list contains up to 50 files from the latest print jobs Net Auth Log This is shows users and their IDs who logged in the domain Counter info You can view the amount of each category that your machine has printed so far Fax Options You can set to print the information of a fax reports a This menu only appears when an optional hard disk drive HDD has been installed Z You can also print the machine s status information and browse status with SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser on your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click Information gt Print i
86. to Page This option allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the document size This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document eRGB Color This setting determines how colors are rendered Standard is the most widely used setting which the color tone of this mode is the closest to that of standard monitor SRGB Monitor Vivid mode is appropriate for printing presentation data and charts The color tone of Vivid mode produces more Vivid color images than that of Standard mode Device mode is best used for printing fine lines small characters and color drawings The color tone of Device mode may be different from that of monitor the pure toner colors are used for printing cyan magenta and yellow colors Screen This option affect the resolution and clarity of your color output Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper This feature provides a cost effective way to print draft pages 1 Open an application and select Print from the File menu 2 Select Layout from the drop down list under Orientation In the Pages per Sheet drop down list select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper Printer 4H la Presets Standard H Copies 1 Collated O Two Sided Pages BA Bi a Fram 1 to 1 Paper Size Ad FER 20 99 by 29 70 om Orientation LG ka Layout Pa Pages par
87. transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device A Wireless devices are not user serviceable Do not modify them in any way Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it Contact manufacturer for service FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use A While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W cm2 may be exceeded at distances close to the antenna installed Therefore the user must maintain a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times This device cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna TS E E EIR E EIRA BIL R AE RSS gt FERRET AY o BE gt ease EFA MS HE gt MATIRA RELET LIT EIRE PTR BIRRA ERL EHNE ERMA EAFA E gt Turkey only RARA BWR IF gt FET BIE gt ENE EREHE fa BUT o AUR GAs gt TEE ASE FSR AR E TSS AE FE SR eS Ss BK SE P ER Bc teat Pk A PISCE PAE ENRE L TE o e ROHS EEE Y netmeli ine Uygundur This EEE is compliant with RoHS e Bu r n n ortalama ya am s resi 7 y l garanti suresi 2 yildir Regulatory information_ 4 Russia only T
88. uninstall sh d Click Uninstall e Click Next f Click Finish Sharing your machine locally Follow the steps below to set up the computers to share your machine locally If the Host computer is directly connected to the machine with a USB cable and is also connected to the local network environment the client computer connected to the local network can use the shared machine through the host computer to print A computer which is directly connected to Host computer 1 the machine by USB cable Client computers Computers which use the machine shared 2 through the host computer Windows Setting up a host computer 1 Install your printer driver See Installing USB connected machine s driver on page 3 Installing network connected machine s driver on page 3 2 Click the Windows Start menu 3 For Windows 2000 select Settings gt Printers For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes For Windows 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers 4 Right click your printer icon 5 For Windows XP 2003
89. was created The Direct Printing Utility program supports the PDF version 1 4 and below For a higher version you must open the file to print it What is Direct Printing Utility Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly to your machine to print without having to open the file It sends data through the Windows spooler using the port of the printer driver It only supports PDF format To install this program select Custom installation and put a check mark in this program when you install the printer driver Printing There are several ways you can print using the Direct Printing Utility From the Direct Printing Utility window 1 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt Direct Printing Utility gt Direct Printing Utility Or double click the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desktop The Direct Printing Utility window opens 2 Select your machine from the Select Printer drop down list and click Browse 3 Select the PDF file you wish to print and click Open The PDF file is added in the Selected Files section 4 Customize the machine settings for your needs 5 Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the machine Printing 7 Using the shortcut icon 1 Select the PDF file you wish to print drag and drop it to the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top The selected PDF file is sent to the default machine iH If the defau
90. 0 Margins tab Use Margins Set the margins for the document By default margins are not enabled The user can change the margin settings by changing the values in the respective fields Set by default these values depend on the page size selected eUnit Change the units to points inches or centimeters Samsung Printer tab Select various options in the JCL and General frames to customize various settings These options are specific to the printer and depend on the PPD file copying This chapter gives you step by step instructions for copying documents This chapter includes e Basic copy e Changing the settings for each copy e Changing the default copy settings Basic copy This is the normal and usual procedure for copying your originals 1 Press SG Copy on the control panel 2 Place originals face up in the document feeder Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the scanner lid 3 If necessary adjust the settings for each copy such as Reduce Enlarge Darkness Original Type and more See Changing the settings for each copy on page 1 4 Enter the number of copies using the arrow or number keypad if necessary 5 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying l4 To cancel the current copy job press Stop Clear on the control panel Changing the settings for each copy Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you
91. 0M Full Wireless WLAN Settings Wizard Custom WLAN Default WLAN Signal Clear Setting Network Info Document Box Doc Box Feature Task From Box Add From Scan Doc Box Setup Task From Box Add From Scan Doc Box Report a This setting may not be available depending on your country b This menu only appears when an optional hard disk drive HDD has been installed c This menu only appears when the toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life Machine status and advanced feature 7 management tools This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine This chapter includes e Introducing useful management tools e Using SyncThru Web Service e Using the Smart Panel program Introducing useful management tools The programs below help you to use your machine conveniently e Using SyncThru Web Service on page 1 e Using the Smart Panel program on page 2 e Smarthru Office on page 3 e Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator on page 4 Using SyncThru Web Service if Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for SyncThru Web Service If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP IP network parameters correctly you can manage the machine via SyncThru Web Service an embedded web server Use SyncThru Web Service to e View the machine s device information and c
92. 1 Press ps Fax on the control panel 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs See Adjusting the document settings on page 6 Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Multi Send and press OK Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press OK You can press speed dial numbers or select group dial number using Address book button For details see Setting up address book on page 7 8 Enter the second fax number and press OK mg IG i The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document 9 To enter more fax numbers press OK when Yes highlights and repeat steps 7 and 8 You can add up to 10 destinations 10 Press OK to start storing the scanned original data into memory IZ Once you entered a group dial number you cannot enter another group dial numbers anymore 11 When you have finished entering fax numbers press the left right arrow to select No when Another Page appears 12 If an original is placed on the scanner glass select Yes to add another pages Load another original and press OK When you have finished select No when Another Page appears The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the order in which you entered them
93. 2 11b g can share same hardware and use the 2 4 GHz band 802 11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps 802 11g up to 54 Mbps 802 11b g devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave ovens cordless telephones and Bluetooth devices Access point Access Point or Wireless Access Point AP or WAP is a device that connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks WLAN and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals ADF An Automatic Document Feeder ADF is a mechanism that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once AppleTalk AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple Inc for computer networking It was included in the original Macintosh 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking BIT Depth A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors As the number of bits increases the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map 1 bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem GDI and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol A network prot
94. 2Side Short Prints pages to be read by flipping like a note pad gt vil NO mg B 3 2 gt 1Side Scans both sides of the originals and prints each of one on a separate sheet AA AA BB gt A B 2 gt 2Side Scans both sides of the original and prints on both sides of the paper This function produces exactly the same print out from the originals AA AA A gt A 2 gt 1Side ROT2 Scans both sides of the original and prints each one on a separate sheet but the information on the back side of the gt 5 6 printout is rotated 180 AA AA A gt A Press OK to save your selection Start copying a document m Setting copy timeout You can set the time the machine waits before it restores the default control panel settings if you press Start button prior to the control panel restoring to default the previous job will be reprinted 1 a RON o Copying 5 Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Timeout and press OK Press the up down arrow until the time setting you want is highlighted Selecting Off means that the machine does not restore the default settings until you press Start to begin copying or Stop Clear to cancel Press OK to save the selection Press Stop Clear to
95. AES Introducing useful network programs There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in network environment For the network administrator especially managing several machines on the network is possible Before using the programs below set the IP address first e Installing network connected machine s driver e Pv6 Configuration SyncThru Web Service Web server embedded on your network machine which allows you to e Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments e Customize machine settings See Using SyncThru Web Service on page 1 SyncThru Web Admin Service A web based machine management solution for network administrators SyncThru Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate internet access Download this program from http solution samsungprinter com SetIP This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP IP protocol See IPv4 setting using SetlP Program Windows on page 2 IPv4 setting using SetlP Program Macintosh on page 2 or IPv4 setting using SetIP Program Linux on page 3 4 TCP IPv6 is not supported by this program Using a wired network You must set up the network protocols on yo
96. AIN TWAIN is the one of a preset imaging applications Scanning an image launches the selected application enabling you to control the scanning process This feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection See Scanning with TWAIN enabled software on page 6 e SmarThru Office This program is the accompanying software for your machine You can use this program to scan images or documents This feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection See Smarthru Office on page 3 e WIA WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition To use this feature your computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB cable See Scanning using the WIA driver on page 6 e USB Memory You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto an USB memory device See Scanning to an USB memory device on page 1 e Email You can send the scanned image as an email attachment See Scanning originals and sending through email Scan to Email on page 1 e FTP You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP server See Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to server on page 4 e SMB You can scan an image and send it to a shared folder on an SMB server See Scanning originals and sending via SMB FTP Scan to server on page 4 e Changing the default scan settings e Scan on both sides of paper e Scanning with TWAIN enabled software e Scanning using the WIA driver e Macintos
97. Before doing that you must have the relevant information concerning the type of network protocols and computer system you use If you are not sure which setting to use contact your network administrator to configure this machine to the network 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight Network and press OK 3 Press the up down arrow until the setup option you want is highlighted and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow until the setting you want is highlighted and press OK 5 Repeat steps 3 through 4 as needed 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Option Description TCP IP IPv4 TCP IP IPv6 Select appropriate protocol and configure parameters to use the network environment Ethernet Speed Configure the network transmission speed Wireless Configure the wireless network environments Clear Setting Reverts the network settings to the default values Network Info This list shows information on your machine s network connection and configuration a This menu only appears when an optional wireless network interface has been installed Document management This menu only appears when an optional hard disk drive HDD has been installed This menu allows you to store the scanned documents in a box set various options for stored documents and change the default settings for stored documents fH eTo use this menu you need to create
98. Book Select Search ID to search for an entry by the first few letters of the name 6 Press the up down arrow until the name you want is highlighted and press OK Or enter the first letters Press the up down arrow until the name you want highlights and press OK 7 Press OK when Yes highlights to confirm the deletion 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Printing Address Book You can check your Address Book settings by printing a list 1 Press ps Fax on the control panel 2 Press Address Book on the control panel 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Print and press OK The machine begins printing Printing sent fax report automatically You can set the machine to print a report with detailed information about the previous 50 communication operations including time and dates oo 2 BY s9 Press amp Fax on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Auto Report and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight On and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Faxing_ 9 using usb memory device This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine This chapter includes e About USB memory device e Scanning to an USB memory device e Printing from a USB memory device About USB memory device USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory ca
99. Delaying a fax transmission You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be present You cannot send a color fax using this feature 1 Press ps Fax on the control panel Q 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs See Adjusting the document settings on page 6 Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Delay Send and press OK Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK You can press speed dial numbers or select group dial number using Address book button For details see Setting up address book on page 7 8 The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document 9 To enter more fax numbers press OK when Yes highlights and repeat steps 7 You can add up to 10 destinations NOS Y Once you entered a group dial number you cannot enter another group dial numbers anymore 10 When you have finished entering fax numbers press the left right arrow to select No when Another Page appears and press OK 11 Enter the job name you want and press OK For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters see Entering characters using the number keypad on page 2 If you do not want to assign a name skip this step 12 Enter the time using
100. ING SYSTEM CPU RAM free HDD space Mac OS X e Intel e 128 MB fora 1 GB 10 3 10 4 Processors PowerPC based e PowerPC G4 Mac 512 MB G5 e 512 MB fora Intel based Mac 1 GB Mac OS X e Intel 512 MB 1 GB 1 GB 10 5 Processors e 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4 G5 Mac OS X e Intel 1 GB 2 GB 1 GB 10 6 Processors Linux Item Requirement recommended Operating RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4 5 32 64 bit system Fedora Core 2 10 32 64 bit SuSE Linux 9 1 32 bit OpenSuSE 9 2 9 3 10 0 10 1 10 2 10 3 11 0 11 1 32 64 bit Mandrake 10 0 10 1 32 64 bit Mandriva 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 32 64 bit Ubuntu 6 06 6 10 7 04 7 10 8 04 8 10 32 64 bit SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9 10 32 64 bit Debian 3 1 4 0 5 0 32 64 bit CPU Pentium IV 2 4 GHz Intel Core 2 RAM 512 MB 1024 MB Free HDD space 1 GB 2 GB if elt is necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for working with large scanned images The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at maximum UNIX Item Requirements Operating Sun Solaris SPARC system Sun Solaris x86 HP UX PA RISC HP UX Itanium IBM AIX Power Free HDD space Up to 100 MB Installing USB connected machine s driver A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using the USB cable If your machine is attached to a network skip the following steps below and go
101. K Controlling the active job queue All of the print jobs waiting to be printed are listed in the active job queue in the order you sent them to the printer You can delete a job from the queue before printing or promote a job to print sooner 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press left right arrow until Job Management appears and press OK 3 Press left right arrow until Active Job appears and press OK 4 Press left right arrow until the user s name and file name you want to use appears and press OK IZ If the select file is a confidential print job enter the specified 4 digit password Use the left right arrow to enter digits When you press OK the cursor will move to the next character When you finish entering the password press OK Supplies and accessories_ 5 If you enter the incorrect password Invalid Password appears Reenter the correct password 5 Press the left right arrow until the desired setting appears and press OK eCancel You can delete a file from the queue Promote You can select a job waiting in the active job queue and change its print order so that it can be printed sooner Release You can print a job scheduled to be printed at a specified time immediately In this case the job currently printing is stopped and the selected job will be printed This function is available when the job is scheduled for later printing 6 When Yes appears press OK File Policy You can choose the file policy fo
102. Linux printing on page 10 UNIX basic printing See UNIX printing on page 12 The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows XP Your Printing Preferences window may differ depending on your operating system or the application you are using 1 Open the document you want to print 2 Select Print from the File menu The Print window appears 3 Select your machine from the Select Printer list General Select Printer Status Ready C Print to file Location Comment Page Range All Number of copies 4 ra i 3 Oke cee The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range are selected within the Print window IZ To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver click Properties or Preferences in the application s Print window to change the print setting See Opening printing preferences on page 2 4 To start the print job click OK or Print in the Print window Z eThe PostScript driver is recommended for best print image quality from PostScript based applications such as Acrobat Reader Adobe Illustrator Adobe Photoshop etc elf you are using Windows Internet Explorer the Samsung AnyWeb Print too will save your time for screen captured images or printing the image Click Start gt All programs gt Samsung Printers gt your machine name gt Samsung AnyWeb gt Download the lastest version to link the website where the tool
103. OD CEYILINTEE CRETIN imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product copyright 2009 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd All rights reserved This user s guide is provided for information purposes only All information included herein is subject to change without notice Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages arising from or related to use of this user s guide e Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd e PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company e Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation e PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System Inc e UFST and MicrolType are registered trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc e TrueType LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc e All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations Refer to the LICENSE txt file in the provided CD ROM for the open source license information REV 2 00 Copyright_ 1 safety information These warnings and precautions are included in order to prevent injury to you and others as well as preventing any potential damage to your machine Be sure to read and understand all of these instructions before using the machine Use common sense for operating any electrical appliance and whe
104. OM and open the disk window Open the MAC Installer gt MAC Printer gt SetIP gt SetiIPApplet html 3 Double click the file and Safari will automatically open then select Trust The browser will open the SetIPApplet html page that shows the printer s name and IP address information 4 Click on the f8 icon third from left in the SetIP window to open the TCP IP configuration window 5 Enter the printer s new information into the configuration window as follows In a corporate intranet you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding eMAC Address Find the machine s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons For example 00 15 99 29 51 A8 becomes 0015992951A8 K The MAC address is the hardware serial number of the on board network interface and can be found on the Network Configuration Report eIP Address Enter a new IP address for your printer For example if your computer s IP address is 192 168 1 150 enter 192 168 1 X X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer s address Subnet Mask Enter a new Subnet Mask for your machine eDefault Gateway Enter a new Gateway for your machine 6 Select Apply then OK and OK again The printer will automatically print the configuration report Confirm that all of the settings are correct Quit Safari You may close and eject the installation CD ROM If necessary restart the computers firew
105. Open System and then press OK SharedKey Authentication is used A device that has a proper WEP Key can access the network Enter the WEP Key using number keypad after selecting SharedKey and then press OK eWPA PSK or WPA2 PSK You can select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK to authenticate the print server based on WPA Pre Shared Key This uses a shared secret key generally called Pre Shared Key passphrase which is manually configured on the access point and each of its clients a Press OK when WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK appears on the bottom line of the display b Press the up down arrow to select TKIP or AES in Encryption and press OK If you select WPA2 PSK press the up down arrow to select AES or TKIP AES in Encryption and press OK c Enter the WPA Key using number keypad and press OK 5 When you have finished press Stop Clear to return to the ready mode If you do not know about your wireless environment please ask the network administrator Disconnect the network cable standard or crossover Your machine should then start communicating wirelessly with the network In case of Ad hoc mode you can use a wireless LAN and wired LAN simultaneously Now go to Installing network connected machine s driver on page 3 Using SyncThru Web Service For information about configuring and using the machine on a wireless network environment refer to the Wireless network install guide provided with the wireless network interface card Y
106. Paper tab in the Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 Setting the paper type Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Paper Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Paper Type and press OK Press the up down arrow to select the paper tray you want and press OK Press the up down arrow to select the paper type you want Press OK to save the selection NAGNA mg i 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Setting the paper source 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Paper Setup and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Paper Source and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow to highlight Copy Tray or Fax Tray and press OK 6 Press the up down arrow to select the paper tray you want 7 Press OK to save the selection 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode iH If you want to use special sized paper such as a billing paper select Edit in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 Selecting an output location 4 The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large number of pages at once Make sure that you do not touch the surface and do not allow children near it The printed pages
107. Possible cause Solution Faxes do not store in memory There may not be enough memory space to store the fax If the display indicating the memory status shows delete any faxes you no longer need from the memory and then try to store the fax again Call for service Blank areas appear at the bottom of each page or on other pages with a small strip of text at the top You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting For details about paper settings See Setting the paper size and type on page 7 PostScript file cannot be printed The PostScript driver may not be installed correctly Install the PostScript driver See Installing USB connected machine s driver on page 3 e Print a configuration page and verify that the PS version is available for printing e Reinstall the PS driver If the problem persists contact a service representative Samsung Scan and Fax Manager Problem Condition suggested solution Samsung Scan and Fax Manager does not work Check your system requirements Samsung Scan and Fax Manager works in Window and Macintosh See System requirements on page 2 Check that the Samsung Scan and Fax Manager is installed by looking under All programs in windows If not installed and or working correctly reinstalled using the CD supplied with the product or download the latest version from the Samsung website www samsung
108. Printer Click Add a local printer on the Add Printer windows Follow the instruction on the window If the machine does not work in the network environment activate IPv6 Refer to the next section followed by ae IPv6 NOAAGNA 9 Connect your machine to the network with a network cable Turned on the machine Press Menu on the control panel Press up down arrow to highlight Network and press OK Press up down arrow to highlight TCP IP IPv6 and press OK Press up down arrow to highlight IPv6 Activate and press OK Press up down arrow to highlight On and press OK On is set as a default Turn the machine off and turn it on again Print a Network Configuration Report from the machine s control panel that will check IPv6 addresses 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press up down arrow to highlight Network and press OK 3 Press up down arrow to highlight Network Info and press OK Network setup_ 6 Setting IPv6 addresses Machine supports following IPv6 addresses for network printing and managements Link local Address Self configured local IPv6 address Address starts with FE80 Stateless Address Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network router Stateful Address Pv6 address configured by a DHCPV6 server Manual Address Manually configured IPv6 address by a user DHCPv6 address configuration Stateful If you have a DHCPV6 server on your network you can set one of the following option for d
109. RADIUS enables centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA authentication authorization and accounting concept to manage network access Resolution The sharpness of an image measured in Dots Per Inch DPI The higher the dpi the greater the resolution SMB Server Message Block SMB is a network protocol mainly applied to share files printers serial ports and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network It also provides an authenticated Inter process communication mechanism SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP is the standard for e mail transmissions across the Internet SMTP is a relatively simple text based protocol where one or more recipients of a message are specified and then the message text is transferred It is a client server protocol where the client transmits an email message to the server SSID Service Set Identifier SSID is a name of a wireless local area network WLAN All wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other The SSIDs are case sensitive and have a maximum length of 32 characters Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host address TCP IP The Transmission Control Protocol TCP and the Internet Protocol IP the set of communications protocols that implement th
110. RB S T 11363 2006 pas HEP xe AY Ika AR UERJ HWA Mean AeA Ome AERA a aCe AGN AAAS ZA Fi FR Ja BU SEMANA AHAHAH ED Jot KE EBV PARERIK E BRINE Hy RARE A Ba RAS HA SJ T 11363 2006 Er EmA Regulatory information_ 10 about this user s guide This user s guide provides information about how to use the machine Both novice and professional users can refer to this as a guide for installing and using the machine 4 eRead the safety information before using the machine elf you have a problem using the machine refer to the troubleshooting chapter See Troubleshooting on page 1 Terms used in this user s guide are explained in the glossary chapter See Glossary on page 1 All illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models The procedures in this user s guide are mainly based on Windows XP Convention Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably as below e Document is synonymous with original e Paper is synonymous with media or print media e Machine refers to printer or MFP The following table offers the conventions of this guide Convention Description Example Bold For texts on the display or button names on the machine Start Note Provides additional information or detailed specification of the machine function 4 The date format may differ from country and feature to country Ca
111. SB connected machine s driver on page 3 or Installing network connected machine s driver on page 3 2 Click the Windows Start menu 3 For Windows 2000 select Settings gt Printers For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes For Windows 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers 4 Right click your machine 5 For Windows XP 2003 2008 Vista press Properties For PS driver select PS driver and right click to open Properties For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 from context menus select the Printer properties LY If Printer properties item has mark you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer 6 In printer driver properties select Device Options 7 Click Job Accounting and select one of the options User permission If you check this option only users with user permission can start a print job Group permission If you check this option only groups with group permission can start a print job iY elf you want to encrypt job accounting password check Job Accounting Password Encryption eAdministrators can enable job accounting and configure permissions in SyncThru Web Admin Service 8 Click OK until you exit the Printer properties window Macintosh printing T
112. Samsung for pan European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network PSTN in accordance with Directive 1999 5 EC The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European countries In the event of problems you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd in the first instance The product has been tested against TBR21 To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard the European Telecommunication Standards Institute ETSI has issued an advisory document EG 201 121 which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals The product has been designed against and is fully compliant with all of the relevant advisory notes contained in this document European Radio Approval Information for products fitted with EU approved radio devices Low power Radio LAN type devices radio frequency RF wireless communication devices operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz band may be present embedded in your printer system which is intended for home or office use This section is only applicable if these devices are present Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark with a Notified Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on t
113. SetIP Program Windows This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine A MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report For using SetIP program disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following 1 Open Control Panel 2 Double click Security Center 3 Click Windows Firewall 4 Disable the firewall Installing the program 1 Insert the Printer Software CD ROM provided with your machine When the driver CD runs automatically close that window 2 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer and open the X drive X represents your CD ROM drive 3 Double click Application gt SetIP 4 Double click Setup exe to install this program 5 Click OK If necessary select a language from the drop down list 6 Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation Starting the program 1 Connect your machine and the computer using network cable 2 Turn on the machine 3 From the Windows Start menu select All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt SetIP gt SetIP 4 Click on the Es icon third from left in the SetlP window to open the TCP IP configuration window 5 Enter the machine s new information into the configuration window as follows TCP IP Configuration TCP IP Mac Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default G
114. Sf 7 When selecting labels consider the following factors Adhesives The adhesive material should be stable at your machine s fusing temperature about 170 C 338 F Arrangement Only use labels with no exposed backing between them Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels causing serious jams Curl Prior to printing labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction Condition Do not use labels with wrinkles bubbles or other indications of separation Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing which can cause paper jams Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled bubbled or otherwise damaged Card stock Custom sized paper Sf 7 Do not print on media smaller than 98 mm 3 9 inches wide or 148 mm 5 8 inches long In the software application set margins at least 6 4 mm 0 25 inches away from the edges of the material Letterhead Preprinted paper Single sided double sided Tray1 Face up Optional tray Face down Multi purpose tray Letterhead Preprinted paper must be printed with
115. System Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Import Setting and press OK Press the up down arrow until the data type you want is highlighted and press OK 7 Press the up down arrow until the file containing the data you want to restore highlights and press OK 8 To restore the backup file to the machine press the left right arrow to highlight Yes and press OK 9 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode mm mo N Managing USB memory You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or all at once by reformatting the device A After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device files cannot be restored Therefore confirm that you no longer need the data before deleting it Deleting an image file 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine Press Direct USB on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight File Manage and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Delete and press OK Press the up down arrow until the folder or file you want is highlighted and press OK ot ma OY NO Using USB memory device 2 iH If you see in the front of a folder name there are one or more files or folders in the selected folder If you selected a file the display shows the size of the file for about 2 seconds Go to the next step If you selected a folder press the up down
116. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson th cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes softwar
117. a box first Creating and editing the box can only be done through SyncThru Web Service See Box tab on page 1 Machine status and advanced feature_ 4 Common Box is provided by default 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight Document Box and press OK 3 Press the up down arrow until the setup option you want is highlighted and press OK Option Description Doc Box Feature Add From Scan You can store scanned documents in a box The stored file will be named automatically as yearmonthdayhourminutesecond e Task From Box You can print a document from a box Doc Box Setup Add From Scan You can set the default options for storing the document to a box e Task From Box You can set the default options for printing the document from a box Doc Box Report You can print a report about documents stored in a box K For the document stored in the Secure Box you can set the password for accessing the document Job management This menu item is avaidlable when the optional hard disk or memory is installed See Printing with the optional hard disk on page 8 or Printing with the optional memory CLX 6250 Series only on page 5 Menu overview The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine s functions These menus can be accessed by pressing Menu Some menus may not appear in the disp
118. achine with which you are communicating does not support Super Fine resolution the machine transmits using the highest resolution mode supported by the other fax machine Photo Fax Originals containing shades of gray or photographs K The resolution setting is applied to the current fax job To change the default setting see Change default on page 2 Darkness You can select the degree of darkness of the original document Press ps Fax on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Darkness and press OK Press the up down arrow until the option you want highlights and press OK 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job To change the default setting see Change default on page 2 oe oN oS Scan size You can choose the size to be scanned K The scan size options may vary between document feeder or scanner glass Press ps Fax on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Scan Size and press OK Press the up down arrow until the scan size you want highlights and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Mar oo a o Forwarding a fax to another destination You can set the machine to forward the received or se
119. age Meaning Suggested solutions Paper Empty in yyy Paper is empty There is no paper in the tray Load paper in the tray See Loading paper in the tray on page 3 Message Meaning Suggested solutions in yyy Load paper Jam bottom of Paper has jammed Clear the jam See In duplex during duplex printing the duplex unit area on page 7 Network Error There is a problem with the network There is a problem with the network Check the network If the problem persists ask the system administrator or the person who has set up your local network Jam in exit area Paper has jammed in exit area Clear the jam See In exit area on page 5 No Answer The remote fax machine has not The remote fax machine has not answered after several redial attempts Try again Verify the number to ensure that a fax can be received Jam inside machine Paper has jammed inside the machine Clear the jam See Inside the machine on page 4 Jam inside of duplex Paper has jammed during duplex printing Clear the jam See In the duplex unit area on page 7 Jam top of duplex Paper has jammed during duplex printing Clear the jam See In the duplex unit area on page 7 Junk Fax Error The machine has The received fax data answered Not proper room The machine is inaroom Move the machine to a temperature with improper r
120. al 500 sheets of plain paper See Available accessories on page 2 IZ Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems requiring repairs Such repairs are not covered by the warranty or service agreements 1 Pull out tray And adjust the tray size to the media size you are loading See Changing the tray size on page 3 2 Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading papers 1 Paper limit mark 2 Paper level indicator Media and tray_ 3 Paper quantity indicator shows the amount of paper in the tray NN CY 9 2 1 Full 2 Empty 4 When you print a document set the paper type and size for the tray For information about setting the paper type and size on the control panel See Setting the paper size and type on page 7 l4 elf you experience problems with paper feeding check whether the paper meets the media specification Then try placing one sheet at a time in the multi purpose tray See Print media specifications on page 3 The settings made from the machine driver override the settings on the control panel a To print in application open an application and start the print menu b Open Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 c Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences and select an appropriate paper type d Select tray in paper source then press OK e Start printi
121. all You have successfully changed the IP address subnet mask and gateway IPv4 setting using SetIP Program Linux The SetIP program should be automatically installed during the printer driver installation The path and Uls may differ by Linux OS version Refer to the Linux OS manual to turn firewall off 1 Print the machine s network configuration report to find your machine s MAC address 2 Open the opt Samsung mfp share utils 3 Double click the SetIPApplet html file 4 Click to open the TCP IP configuration window 5 Enter the MAC address IP address subnet mask default gateway and then click Apply When you enter the MAC address enter it without a colon 6 The machine prints the network information Confirm all of the settings are correct 7 Close the SetIP program Network parameter setting You can also set up the various network settings through the network administration programs such as SyncThru Web Admin Service and SyncThru Web Service Restoring factory default settings using SyncThru Web Service 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer Safari or Firefox and enter your machine s new IP address in the browser window For example http 192 168 1 133 2 Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service 3 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website A log in page appears 4 Type in the ID and Password then click Login If it s your
122. alling the printer choose any of the image text PS or HPGL files to print 1 Execute printui lt file_name_to_print gt command For example you are printing document printui document This will open the UNIX Printer Driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select various print options PrintUl Print Job Manager Printer Choose Printer P roperties Type Postscript Set as D efault Description Color Printer Location Reseption Page Selection q Copies A All Pages w Even Pages Number of Copies 1 S w Odd Pages w Page Range fi _j Collate Copies ex 1 2 5 10 15 _j Reverse Order 6 Unified Unix Printer Driver oie a en O K Cancel H elp 2 Select a printer which has been already added 3 Select the printing options from the window such as Page Selection 4 Select how many copies needed in Number of Copies iH To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver press Properties See Changing the printer settings on page 12 5 Press OK to start the print job Changing the printer settings The UNIX Printer Driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select various print options in printer Properties The following hot keys may also be used H for Help O for OK and A for Apply and C for Cancel PrintUl Printer Properties OVAA EENAA E ONE AE PESTS IRSA Mee General Image Text HPGL 2 Margi
123. allows administrators to create their own installation package with the installation setting you want You can choose the drivers or software to be installed assigned printer printer name sharing options default printer and so on The created installation package can be distributed as a single self extraction EXE package to clients through file servers or special distribution servers You can also create an install script file for silent installation Creating a setup package You can create a setup package from CD to a local folder The created setup package will include only selected device drivers or application There are two types of setup package you can create Normal setup exe and Self Extraction Package Normal setup exe will extract only selected driver or application files from CD Self Extraction Package will package like normal installation CD package as a single self extractable setup exe file 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to the network or USB and powered on 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive The software CD should automatically run and an installation window appears elf the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive Click OK elf you use Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start gt All programs gt Accessories gt Run Type X Setup exe replacing
124. amsung com ie RUSSIA 8 800 555 55 55 www samsung ru SINGAPORE 1800 SAMSUNG www samsung com sg 726 7864 SLOVAKIA 0800 SAMSUNG www samsung com sk 726 7864 SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG www samsung com za 726 7864 SPAIN 902 1 SAMSUNG 902 172 www samsung com es 678 SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 www samsung com se SAMSUNG SWITZERLAND 0848 SAMSUNG 7267864 www samsung com ch CHF 0 08 min TADJIKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 TAIWAN 0800 329 999 www samsung com tw THAILAND 1800 29 3232 www samsung com th 022 689 3232 TRINIDAD amp 1 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com latin TOBAGO 726 7864 TURKEY 444 77 11 www samsung com tr U A E 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com ae 8000 4726 U K 0845 SAMSUNG www samsung com uk 726 7864 U S A 1 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com us 7267864 UKRAINE 8 800 502 0000 www samsung ua www samsung com ua_r u UZBEKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com kz_ru VENEZUELA 0 800 100 5303 www samsung com latin VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www samsung com vn Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 2 glossary The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user s guide 802 11 802 11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network WLAN communication developed by the IEEE LAN MAN Standards Committee IEEE 802 802 11b g 80
125. and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser 3 Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website A log in page appears 5 Type in the ID and Password then click Login If it s your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service type in the below default ID and password eID admin Password sec00000 6 Make sure you have configured individual address book 7 Click Address Book gt E mail Group 8 Click Add Group 9 When the Add Group screen appears select the Speed No number and enter Group Name Z You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for Add individual s after this group is created 10 Click Apply Searching Address Book for an entry There are two ways to search for an address in memory You can either scan from 0 to 199 sequentially or search by entering the first letters of the name associated with the address Searching sequentially through memory 1 Press gt Scan Email and Address Book on the control panel 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight Search amp Dial and press OK 3 Press the up down arrow until the option you want highlights and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight All and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow until the name and address you want is highlighted You can search upwards or downwards through the entire memory in index numerical order
126. ange to the available server BOOTP problem There is a problem with Check your network Send Error There is a problem in SMTP authentication There is a problem in SMTP authentication Configure the authentication setting BOOTP has a the network environment or contact problem Switching your network to Auto IP administrator DHCP problem There is a problem with Check your network DHCP has a the network environment or contact problem your network Reconfigure BOOTP static IP administrator Send Error There is a problem on the NIC Card There is a problem on network interface card Turn the power switch off and on If the problem persists call for service DHCP problem There is a problem with Check your network Sensor Failure aaa Turn off then on There is a problem in the sensor signal Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists call for service DHCP has a the network environment or contact problem Switching your network to Auto IP administrator BOOTP problem There is a problem with Check your network BOOTP has a the network environment or contact problem your network Reconfigure DHCP static IP administrator Mail Size Error Mail exceeds than server support The mail size is larger than the supported size by SMTP server Divide your mail or reduce the resolution System error Error aaa Turn off t
127. anic Photo Conductor OPC is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer and it is usually green or rust colored and a cylinder shaped An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage in the printer and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from grits of a paper and the drum cleaning blade Originals The first example of something such as a document photograph or text etc which is copied reproduced or translated to produce others but which is not itself copied or derived from something else OSI Open Systems Interconnection OSI is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization ISO for communications OSI offers a standard modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable self contained functional layers The layers are from top to bottom Application Presentation Session Transport Network Data Link and Physical PABX A private automatic branch exchange PABX is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise PCL Printer Command Language PCL is a Page Description Language PDL developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard Originally developed for early inkjet printers PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal dot matrix printer and xerographic printers PDF Portable Doc
128. anned face down on the scanner glass or face up in the document feeder There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan Try the Prescan function to see if that works Try lowering the scan resolution rate Check that the machine printer cable is connected properly Make sure that the machine printer cable is not defective Switch the printer cable with a known good cable If necessary replace the printer cable Check that the scanner is configured correctly Check scan setting in the SmarThru Office or the application you want to use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port for example USB001 The machine is not working there is no display or the buttons are not working Unplug the power cord and plug it in again Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet Ensure that the power switch is turned on and the soft power switch on the control panel is pressed No dial tone Check that the phone line is properly connected Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone The numbers stored in memory do not dial correctly Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly Print a Addess Book list See Setting up address book on page 7 The unit scans very slowly Check if the machine is printing received data If so scan the document after the received data has b
129. are doing Key Assigned numbers letters or characters 1 1 2 ABCabc2 3 DEFdef3 4 GHIghi4 5 JKLjkI5 6 MNOmno6 7 PQRSpqrs7 8 TUVtuv8 9 WXYZwxyz9 0 amp 0_ N 1 S These symbols are available when you type for network authentication H lt gt These symbols are available when you type for network authentication Basic setup_ 2 Correcting numbers or names If you make a mistake while entering a number or name press the left right arrow button to delete the last digit or character Then enter the correct number or character Inserting a pause With some telephone systems you must dial an access code 9 for example and listen for a second dial tone In such cases you must insert a pause in the telephone number You can insert a pause while you are setting up speed dial numbers To insert a pause press Redial Pause at the appropriate place while entering the telephone number A dash appears on the display at the corresponding location Using the power saving mode When you are not using the machine for a while use this feature to save power Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Power Save and press OK Press the up down arrow to select the time you want Press OK to save
130. ateway Cancel MAC Address Find the machine s MAC address on the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons For example 00 15 99 29 51 A8 becomes 0015992951A8 Z A MAC address is a hardware serial number of the machine s network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report eIP Address Enter a new IP address for your printer For example if your computer s IP address is 192 168 1 150 enter 192 168 1 X X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer s address Subnet Mask Enter a new Subnet Mask for your machine Default Gateway Enter a new Gateway for your machine 6 Click Apply and then click OK The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report Confirm that all of the settings are correct 7 Click Exit to close the SetIP program 8 If necessary restart the computer s firewall IPv4 setting using SetIP Program Macintosh For using SetIP program disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following Y The path and Uls may differ by Mac OS version Refer to the Mac OS manul to turn firewall off 1 Open System Preferences 2 Click Security Network setup 2 3 Click the Firewall menu 4 Turn the firewall off The following instructions may vary for your model Perform the following to configure the IP address 1 Connect your machine and the computer using network cable 2 Insert the Installation CD R
131. ble reboot the power and try the printing Troubleshooting_ 8 Message Meaning Suggested solutions Replace new ccc toner Replace with new ccc toner cartridge The indicated toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life The machine might stop printing l4 Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life which indicates the average capacity of print outs and is designed pursuant to ISO IEC 19798 The number of pages may be affected by the percentage of image area operating environment printing interval media type and media size Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED is turns on and the printer stops printing e You can choose Stop or Continue as shown on the control panel If you select Stop the printer stops printing and you cannot print any more without changing the cartridge If you select Continue the printer keeps printing but the printing quality cannot be guaranteed Replace the toner cartridge for the best print quality when this message appears Using a cartridge beyond this stage can result in printing quality issues See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 A Samsung does not recommend using non genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured Samsung cannot guarantee non genuine Samsung toner cartridge s quality Service or repair r
132. can quickly and easily make a copy However if you want to change the options for each copy use the copy function buttons on the control panel Z If you press Stop Clear while setting the copy options all of the options you have set for the current copy job will be canceled and return to their default status after the machine completes the copy in progress Changing the darkness If you have an original containing faint marking and dark images you can adjust the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read e Using special copy features e Copying both sides of the originals e Setting copy timeout Press KG Copy on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Darkness and press OK Press the up down arrow until the contrast mode you want is highlighted and press OK eLightest Works well with darker print eLight Works well with dark print eNormal Works well with standard typed or printed originals eDark Works well with light print eDarkest Works well with lighter print or faint pencil markings 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode CAI ma a Selecting the type of originals The original type setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the document type for the current copy job 1 Press SG COPY on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow t
133. ceiving manually in Tel mode You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing Start when you hear a fax tone however you can change the default so fax is priority See Changing the default mode on page 2 The machine begins receiving the fax To change the number of rings see Changing the fax setup options on page 1 Receiving automatically in Answering Machine Fax mode To use this mode you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on the back of your machine See Rear view on page 2 If the caller leaves a message the answering machine stores the message as it would normally If your machine detects a fax tone on the line it automatically starts to receive the fax Faxing_ 4 if elf you have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine is switched off or no answering machine is connected to EXT socket your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined number of rings elf your answering machine has a user selectable ring counter set the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring elf you are in Tel mode when the answering machine is connected to your machine you must switch off the answering machine Otherwise the outgoing message from the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket on the ba
134. cense Agreement Printers Not Found TEEN Piease carefuly read the notice about search resuks 3 Searching Printers gt gt Printers Not Found 4 Installation gt 5 Finish Setup was unable to detect any network or locally connected prinkers Click Search again or Direct Input for assistance to find a printer Note If the cable has been disconnected from your computer this might prevent setup from detecting any printers Please check the cables or dick Help for more information C Check if you want to install the software without connection of the printer SNMP Coererunity Name eCheck if you want to install the software without connecting the printer to the network or locally Check this option to install this program without a machine connected In this case the print a test page window will be skipped and completes the installation Search again When you press this button the firewall notice window appears Turn off the firewall and Search again For Window operating system click Start 5 Control Panel 5 Windows Firewall and inactivate this option For other operating systems refer to their on line guides Turn off all firewall from the third party s program beside the operating system Refer to the manual provided by individual programs eDirect Input The Direct Input allows you to search a specific machine on the network Search by IP address Enter the IP address or the host
135. chine and could result in electric shock or fire AN Caution Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the inside of the machine Do not clean the machine with benzene paint thinner or alcohol do not spray water directly into the machine gt This could result in electric shock or fire When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or cleaning the inside do not operate the machine gt You may get injured Safety information_ 3 Keep cleaning supplies away from children gt Children may get hurt Do not disassemble repair or rebuild the machine by yourself gt It can cause damage to the machine Call a certified technician when the machine needs repair Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean To clean and operate the machine strictly follow the user s from dust or water guide provided with the machine gt This could result in electric shock or fire b Otherwise it can cause damage to the machine O Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with screws gt The machine should only be repaired by Samsung service technician Supply usage AN Caution Do not disassemble the toner cartridge gt Toner dust can be dangerous to humans When storing supplies such as toner cartridges keep them away from children gt Toner dust can be dangerous to humans Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner S Using rec
136. chine from the Select Printer Printing_ 2 4 Click Properties or Preferences gt Printing Preferences eles Basic Paper Graphics Advanced Samsung Orientation Letter Omm 8 50 x 11 00 inches inch Portrak B O Landscape _ Rotate 180 Degrees O Best Normal Al O Draft C Glossy printing Layout Options Type Single Page Per Side v Double Sided Printing Printer Default O None O Long Edge O Short Edge Using a favorite setting The Presets option which is visible on each preferences tab except for Samsung tab allows you to save the current preferences settings for future use To save a Presets item 1 Change the settings as needed on each tab 2 Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box Click Add Presets Quality Draft 3 When you save Presets all current driver settings are saved If you click Add the Add button changes to Update button Select more options and click Update settings will be added to the Presets you made To use a Saved setting select it from the Presets drop down list The machine is now set to print according to the setting you selected To delete saved setting select it from the Presets drop down list and click Delete You can also restore the printer driver s default settings by selecting Default Preset from the Presets drop down list Using help Click the question mark from the upper right corner of the window and cli
137. ck USOC RJ 11C Replacing the Fitted Plug for UK Only Important The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard BS 1363 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse When you change or examine the fuse you must re fit the correct 13 amp fuse You then need to replace the fuse cover If you have lost the fuse cover do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover Contact the people from you purchased the machine The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable However some buildings mainly old ones do not have normal 13 amp plug sockets You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor Do not remove the moulded plug A If you cut off the moulded plug get rid of it straight away You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket Important warning e3 You must earth this machine The wires in the mains lead have the following color code Green and Yellow Earth Blue Neutral Brown Live If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug do the following You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter E or by the safety Earth symbol or colored green and yellow or green You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter N or colored black You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter L or colored red You must have a 13
138. ck on any option you want to know about Then a pop up window appears with information about that option s feature which is provided from the driver If you want to search information via a keyword click the Samsung tab in the Printing Preferences window and enter a keyword in the input line of the Help option To get information about supplies driver update or registration and so on click appropriate buttons Using special print features Special print features include e Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper on page 3 e Printing posters on page 3 e Printing booklets on page 4 e Printing on both sides of paper on page 4 e Change percentage of your document on page 4 e Fitting your document to a selected paper size on page 4 e Using watermarks on page 5 e Using overlay PCL driver only on page 5 e Job Setting CLX 6250 Series only on page 6 e Graphics tab options on page 6 e Enhancing glossiness Windows only on page 7 Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper To print more than one page per sheet the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 Click the Basic tab select Multiple Pages Per Side
139. ck of your machine You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone without going to the fax machine When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones press the keys 9 on the extension phone The machine receives the fax Press the buttons slowly in sequence If you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine try pressing 9 once again 9 is the remote receive code preset at the factory The first and the last asterisks are fixed but you can change the middle number to whatever you wish For details about changing the code see Changing the fax setup options on page 1 Receiving faxes using DRPD mode Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to use a Single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers The particular number someone uses to call you is identified by different ringing patterns which consist of various combinations of long and short ringing sounds This feature is often used by answering services who answer telephones for many different clients and need to know which number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD feature your fax machine can learn the ring pattern you designate to be answered Unless you change it this ringing pattern will continue to be recognized and answered as a fax call and all other ringing patterns will be forwarded to the e
140. com printer Limit Check Error report prints The print job was too complex You might need to reduce the complexity of the page or install more memory See Installing a memory module on page 5 A PostScript error page prints The print job may not be PostScript Make sure that the print job is a PostScript job Check to see whether the software application expected a setup or PostScript header file to be sent to the machine The optional tray is not selected in the driver The printer driver has not been configured to recognize the optional tray Open the PostScript driver properties select the Device Options tab and set the tray option When printing a The resolution Make sure that the Common PostScript problems The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are used document in Macintosh with Acrobat Reader 6 0 setting in the printer driver may not be matched with the resolution setting in your printer driver matches the one in Acrobat or higher colors print incorrectly one in Acrobat Reader Reader Common Windows problems Condition Suggested solutions File in Use message appears during installation Exit all software applications Remove all software from the printer s startup group then restart Windows Reinstall the printer driver General Protection Fault
141. components of machine printer and scanner share the same I O interface port the situation of simultaneous access of different user applications to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device The other user will encounter device busy response This usually happens when starting a scan procedure An appropriate message box appears To identify the source of the problem open the Ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner port s symbol dev mfp0 corresponds to LP 0 designation displayed in the scanners options dev mfp1 relates to LP 1 and so on USB ports start at dev mfp4 so scanner on USB 0 relates to dev mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by another application If this is the case you should either wait for completion of the current job or press the Release port button if you are sure that the present port applicaton is not functioning properly condition Suggested solutions The machine does not print PDF files correctly Some parts of graphics text or illustrations are missing Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options IZ It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image The document has printed but the print job has
142. computer are connected to a network and Samsung Scan and Fax Manager is installed on the computer 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass 3 Press gt Scan Email on the control panel 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Scan To PC and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow to highlight Network PC and press OK iY If you see Not Available message check the port connection 6 Select your registered computer ID and enter the Password if necessary 4 eID is the same ID as the registered Computer ID for Samsung Scan and Fax Manager ePassword is the 4 digit number registered Password for Samsung Scan and Fax Manager 7 Press the up down arrow until the application program you want highlights and press OK Default setting is My Documents l4 To add or delete the folder where the scanned file is saved add or delete the application program in Samsung Scan and Fax Manager gt Properties gt Set Scan Button 8 Press the up down arrow until the setting you want is highlighted and press OK eResolution Sets the image resolution eScan Color Sets the color mode eScan Format Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved eScan Size Sets the image size iY Scan Format appears only when you selected the Scan destination to My Documents elf you want to scan from the default setting press Start 9 Scanning begins iY eScanned image
143. control panel ee E OK o and press OK Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Scan Setup and press OK Press OK when Change Default highlights Press the up down until the scan type you want is highlighted and press Press the up down until the scan setting option you want is highlighted Setting option is the same for each scan type 7 Press the up down arrow until the desired status is highlighted and press OK 8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to set other setting options 9 When you have finished press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Option Description Scan Size Sets the image size l4 The scan size options may vary between document feeder or scanner glass Original Type Sets the original document s type Resolution Sets the image resolution Option Description Scan Color Sets the color mode Scan Format Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved If you select BMP JPEG TIFF or PDF you can select to scan multiple pages if Depending on the selected scan type this option may not appear Printing a report You can print a report on the machine s configuration or font list etc 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Report and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow until the report or list you want to print
144. crews then lift up the cover slightly and pull the cover to the right 1 Control board cover 4 Detach the dummy panel on your machine using a screwdriver Be careful when removing not to damage the plastic cover 5 Take out a new wireless interface card from its bag 6 Place the wireless network interface card into the card guide below item 3 ensure the connector side of the card is to the right 1 wireless network interface card connector 2 wireless network interface card 3 wireless network interface card guide 7 Align the wireless network card connector on the right side of the card with the connector on the control board 1 Press the wireless interface card 2 down firmly into the main connector 1 until it is completely and securely in place Supplies and accessories_ 6 1 Connector 2 Wireless interface card 8 Install the control board cover with the screws removed in step 3 9 Install the rear cover with the screws removed in step 2 10 Plug all the cables back into the machine and turn the machine on 11 Set the wireless network environment 4 For information about configuring and using the printer on a wireless network environment refer to the Wireless network install guide provided with the wireless network interface card You can also configure the network parameters on the co
145. curely latched Close the scanner door until it locks into place Install it TR belt Not The transfer belt of the Install the a compatible machine is not for your Samsung genuine part Transfer belt unit is not compatible Check guide machine designed for your machine Scanner locked Scanner locking switch is locked Release it The scanner module is locked Unlock the CCD See Front view on page 1 Or turn off the machine and on again If the problem persists call for service Transfer belt is low Transfer belt unit will be worn Order new one The life of the transfer belt will expired soon Order a transfer belt See Available accessories on page 2 Troubleshooting_ 11 Message Meaning Suggested solutions Replace TR Belt Replace with new Transfer belt unit The life of the transfer belt has expired Replace the transfer belt with a new one Install a Samsung genuine transfer belt Tray yyy cassette Out Tray yyy cassette is pulled out Insert it properly The tray is not properly closed To close the tray lower the rear edge align it with the slot and slide it into the printer Tray yyy has a problem Communication problem occurred The machine cannot communicate with the optional tray Reinstall the optional tray If the problem persists call for service with tray yyy Tray yyy Not The optional t
146. d select No when Another Page appears The machine begins scanning and then sends the email While the machine is sending an email you cannot use the machine to copy or to send a fax 10 Press the Stop Clear to return to ready mode Storing email addresses You can set up Address Book with the email addresses you use frequently via SyncThru Web Service and then easily and quickly enter email addresses by entering the location numbers assigned to them in Address Book Scanning_ 2 Storing on your local machine This method means that you store email addresses on your machine s memory You can add addresses as well as group them in particular categories Individual 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser 3 Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website A log in page appears 5 Type in the ID and Password then click Login If it s your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service type in the below default ID and password ID admin Password sec00000 6 Click Address Book gt Individual 7 Click Add 8 When the Add screen appears select the Speed No number and enter e mail address and fax number i If you need to set SMB or FTP sever information check SMB or FTP and set the information 9 Click Apply Group 1 Turn your networked computer on
147. d in the tray1 area Clear the jam See In tray 1 on page 3 Motor Error Error aaa Turn off then on There is a problem in the machine Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists call for service Paper Jam in tray2 Paper has jammed in the tray2 area Clear the jam See In optional tray 2 on page 3 Troubleshooting_ 10 Message Meaning Suggested solutions Paper Empty in yyy Paper is empty in yyy Load paper There is no paper in the tray Load paper in the tray See Loading paper in the tray on page 3 Message Meaning Suggested solutions Self Diagnostics The engine in your Please wait a few Paper Mismatch yyy Load zzz xxx Continue Cancel Q The paper size specified in the printer properties does not match the paper you are loading You can select the option between Continue or Cancel If you select Cancel the printing job will stop Load the correct paper in the tray If you select Continue printing job will continue Please Wait printer is performing self minutes diagnostics Send Error There is a problem in Configure the DNS There is a problem in DNS DNS setting Send Error There is a problem in POP3 There is a problem in POPS Configure the POP3 setting Send Error There is a problem in SMTP There is a problem in SMTP Ch
148. d on the paper is completely dry before loading e Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper e Do not load booklets pamphlets transparencies or documents with other unusual characteristics Loading originals You can use the scanner glass or the automatic document feeder to load an original for copying scanning and sending a fax On the scanner glass Make sure that no originals are in the document feeder If an original is detected in the document feeder the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass To get the best scan quality especially for colored or gray scaled images use the scanner glass e Loading paper in the tray e Printing on special media e Setting the paper size and type e Selecting an output location 1 Lift and open the scanner lid 2 Place the original face down on the scanner glass And align it with the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass 3 Close the scanner lid iY eLeaving the scanner lid open while copying will create a black copy and consume a great deal of toner eDust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout Always keep it clean See Cleaning the scan unit on page 3 elf you are copying a page from a book or magazine lift the scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm start copying with
149. d press the Enter key or click Go 2 Your machine s embedded website opens 3 From the Security tab select System Security gt System Administrator 4 Enter the name of the administrator phone number location and E mail address 5 Click Apply Using the Smart Panel program Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine status and allows you to customize the machine s settings For Windows and Macintosh Smart Panel is installed automatically when you install the machine software For Linux you can download Smart Panel from Samsung website and install See Installing the SmartPanel on page 5 iH To use this program you need the following system requirements Windows Check for windows operating system s compatible with your machine See System requirements on page 2 eMac OS X 10 3 or higher eLinux Check for Linux systems that are compatible with your machine See System requirements on page 2 Internet Explorer version 5 0 or higher for flash animation in HTML Help Understanding Smart Panel If an error occurs while printing you can check the error from the Smart Panel You can also launch Smart Panel manually Double click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar in Windows or Notification Area in Linux You can also click it on the status bar in Mac OS X Management tools 2 Windows r3 Double click this icon in Windows Macintosh Ss Click this icon
150. dditional directory URL Uniform Resource Locator URL is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located USB Universal Serial Bus USB is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum Inc to connect computers and peripherals Unlike the parallel port USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals Glossary_ 5 Watermark A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna Italy in 1282 they have been used by papermakers to identify their product and also on postage stamps currency and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802 11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another WIA Windows Imaging Architecture WIA is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA compliant scanner WPA Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a class of systems to secure
151. ded accessories in printer properties on page 4 Printing with the optional memory CLX 6250 Series only K eYou can only use this feature if you have installed the 512 MB optional memory CLX 6250 Series only eAfter installing the optional memory you can use advanced printing features such as proofing a job and specifying of printing a private job in the printer properties window Job Settings This option allows you to choose how to print the printing file by using the 512 MB optional memory 1 Open the document you want to print 2 Select Print from the File menu The Print window appears 3 Select your printer driver from the Select Printer list e nn General Select Printer Status Ready _ Print to file Location rer Page Range All Number of copies 1 4 T la l neh cp The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range are selected within the Print window 4 Access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 5 Click the Advanced tab then select Job Settings 6 Select the Print Mode you want eNormal This mode prints without storing your document in the optional memory eProof This mode is useful when you print more than one copy You can print one copy first to check than print the rest of copies later eConfidential This mode is used for printing confidential documents You need to enter a password to print 7 Select O
152. ds start and end banners and changes the number of pages per sheet eText This option allows you to specify the page margins and set the text options such as spacing or columns Graphics This option allows you to set image options that are used when printing image files such as color options image size or image position Advanced This option allows you to set the print resolution paper source and special print features 5 Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing 7 The Printing window appears allowing you to monitor the status of your print job To abort the current job click Cancel D Printing files You can print many different types of files on your machine using the standard CUPS way directly from the command line interface The CUPS lpr utility allows you to do that But the drivers package replaces the standard Ipr tool by a much more user friendly LPR GUI program To print any document file 1 Type Ipr sfile name gt from the Linux shell command line and press Enter The LPR GUI window appears When you type only Ipr and press Enter the Select file s to print window appears first Just select any files you want to print and click Open 2 n the LPR GUI window select your machine from the list and change the print job properties 3 Click OK to start printing Configuring Printer Properties Using the Printer Properties window pr
153. e detailed information on the bottom right side of the window Select Software and Utilities to Install window appears Check the device drivers or application software you want to included in the setup package and click Next Select Printer connection window appears Select the printer connection type and click Next elf you selected Network Connection Search Network Printers window appears type in the IP address or host name in the information field than click Search when you are finished click Next The discovered printer list will show network printers on the same subnet If you want to specify a network printer that is located over subnet then specify IP address of network printer directly l4 elf you can t search network printers on the network then check whether your firewall setting is disabled If it is enabled disable firewall temporarily and try searching again eSetup configuration script filename is set as CONFIG CI3 and it s not changeable Set Printer Drivers window appears Click Next If necessary configure printer name sharing shared name and default printer setting If you changed settings then you should click Apply button to apply changes then click Next Summary window appears Check the package information and click Next to start creating the setup package You can modify the package configuration by clicking the Back button l4 Check the Install the package as silent mode if you want to make the
154. e straightening and rotation Image Enhancement Allows you to remove various defects of the image and improve its quality Additional settings Allows special processing of scanned images These transformations include stitching several partial image scans Scanning 5 into a single image processing of scanned books and watermark stamping Z Click the Help button from the lower left corner of the window and click on any option you want to know about Then a pop up window appears with information about that option s feature which is provided from the Scan Assistant Changing the scan feature settings Your machine provides you with the following setting options to allow you to customize your scan jobs The settings you change will be maintained for a certain time but after that period the options will be reset to default values e Scan Size Sets the image size e Original Type Sets the original documents s type e Resolution Sets the image resolution e Scan Color Sets the color mode e Scan Format Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved If you select TIFF or PDF you can select to scan multiple pages Depending on the selected scan type this option may not appear To customize the settings before starting a scan job ress Can Emall on the contro panel P 3 S Email on th trol Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Scan Feature and press OK Press the up d
155. e Job management e Menu overview Option Description Changing the fax setup options Your machine provides you with various user selectable options for setting up the fax system You can change the default settings for your preferences and needs To change the fax setup options 1 Press ps Fax on the control panel 2 Press Menu on the control panel 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax Setup and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow until the fax setup item you want is highlighted and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow until the option you want is highlighted and press OK 6 Press the up down arrow until the desired status appears or enter the value for the option you have selected and press OK 7 f necessary repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Sending Send Report You can set your machine to print a confirmation report showing whether a transmission was successful how many pages were sent and more The available options are On Off and On Error which prints only when a transmission is not successful Image TCR This function allows users to know what fax messages have been sent by showing sent messages in the transmission report The first page of the message is turned into an image file than is printed on the transmission report so the users can see what messages have been sent However you can not use this function when sending fax w
156. e and media size Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when Replace new ccc toner appears and the printer stops printing A Samsung does not recommend using non genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as one that is refilled or remanufactured Samsung cannot guarantee a non genuine Samsung toner cartridge s quality Service or repair required as a result of using non genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty if All printing errors will be appear in the Smart Panel program window If the problem persists call for service eCheck the message on the display screen Follow the instructions in the message or refer to troubleshooting part See Understanding display messages on page 8 If the problem persists call for service Introducing the useful buttons Menu button KE When you want to know the machine status and set your machine to use an advanced feature click Menu button See Machine status and advanced feature on page 1 Stop Clear button By pressing the you Can Function Description Cancel print job Press during printing Power Saver button O When the machine is not in use save electricity by pressing the Power Saver button Pressing this button for one second puts the machine into power save mode See Using the power saving mode on page 3 If you press this button for more than three seconds a pop up appears asking if you wan
157. e and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Serial Number and press OK Check your machine s serial number Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode et a Aa Using Toner Low Alert If toner in the cartridge has run out a message informing user to change the toner cartridge appears You can set the option for this message to appear or not 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK 3 Press up down arrow to highlight Maintenance and press OK 4 Press up down arrow to highlight Toner Low Alert and press OK Cleaning a machine If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment you need to clean your machine regularly to keep the best printing condition and use your machine longer AN eCleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol solvent or other strong substances can discolor or distort the cabinet elf your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner we recommend you use cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it If you use a vacuum cleaner toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you Cleaning the outside Clean the machine cabinet with a soft lint free cloth Dampen the cloth slightly with water but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine Cleaning the inside During the printing process paper toner and dust pa
158. e machine s configuration or browse the status Open the web browser in the networked computer and type the machine s IP address When SyncThru Web Service opens click Information gt Print Information Sheet Monitoring the supplies life To view the supply life indicators follow the steps below al a oie a Press Menu on the control panel Press up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press up down arrow to highlight Maintenance and press OK Press up down arrow to highlight Supplies Life and press OK The display shows options as you press up down arrow When you select the option press OK to browse the life Adjusting the color contrast Color menu allows you to adjust the color setting Se eS Press Menu on the control panel Press up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press up down arrow to highlight Maintenance and press OK Press up down arrow to highlight Color and press OK The display shows options as you press up down arrow e Using Toner Low Alert e Cleaning a machine e Storing the toner cartridge e Tips for moving amp storing your machine Option Description Custom Color This menu allows you to adjust contrast color by color e Default Optimizes colors automatically e Manual Adjust Allows you to manually adjust the color contrast for each cartridge It is recommended to use the Default setting for best color quality Auto Color Reg You ca
159. e name gt for point and print Administrator s Guide Windows only 6 Code Language OX0009 English 0X0012 Korean OX0804 Simplified Chinese 0X0404 Traditional Chinese Ox040c French OX0007 German 0X0010 Italian 0X000a Spanish 0X0013 Dutch 0X001D Swedish OX0006 Danish 0X000b Finnish 0X0014 Norwegian 0X0019 Russian 0X0005 Czech OX000e Hungarian 0X0008 Greek 0X0816 Standard Portuguese 0X0416 Brazilian Portuguese 0X0015 Polish OX001F Turkish 0X0001 Arabic OX000D Hebrew 0x0424 Slovenian 0X0418 Romanian 0X0402 Bulgarian OX041A Croatian OX081A Serbian Create Customized Installer related questions Code Language 0X0422 Ukraine 0X041B Slovakia 0X0421 Indonesian Ox041E Thai 0X0429 Farsi Frequently Asked Question Remote Installation related questions No Question Answer 1 Client computers are not listed in the list when logging on as a domain Primary DNS address in all client computers should be specified as your domain server If the client computer is turned off turn it on Cannot access error message appears during workgroup remote installation This error message appears if access was denied You should check the settings of network access sharing and security model for local accounts e From the Windows Start menu click Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Local Security Policy gt Local Policies
160. e one you want to use and click Next When the driver finds only one machine the confirmation window appears After the installation is finished a window asking you to print a test page appears If you want to print a test page click Print a test page Otherwise Just click Next and skip to step 8 If the test page prints out correctly click Yes If not click No to reprint it To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information from Samsung click On line Registration Click Finish If the printer driver does not work properly follow the steps below to repair or reinstall the driver a Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on b From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt your printer driver name gt Maintenance c Select the option you want follow the instruction on the window Macintosh The software CD that came with your machine provides you with the PPD file that allows you to use the CUPS driver or Apple LaserWriter driver only available when you use a machine which supports the PostScript driver for printing on a Macintosh computer 1 aS eS oe a Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop Double click the MAC_Installer folder Double click the Installer OS X icon
161. e only if you have installed the optional hard disk e Print Mode The default Print Mode is Normal which is for printing without saving the printing file in the memory Normal This mode prints without storing your document in the optional memory Confidential This mode is used for printing confidential document You need to enter a password to print Store Select this setting to save a document in the hard disk without printing Spool This option can be useful to handle large amount of data If you select this setting the print spools the document into the hard disk and then prints it from the hard disk queue decreasing the computer s work load Print Schedule Select this setting to print the document at a specified time eUser ID This option is used when you need to find a saved file using the control panel Job Name This option is used when you need to find a saved file using the control panel Paper Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print This will let you get the best quality printout If you load a different type of print material select the corresponding paper type Printer Features Reverse Duplex Printing This option allows you to select general print order compared to duplex print order If this option does not appear your machine does not have this feature eDarken Text Select this option to print texts darker than on a normal document Fit
162. e protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run TCR Transmission Confirmation Report TCR provides details of each transmission such as job status transmission result and number of pages sent This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions TIFF Tagged Image File Format TIFF is a variable resolution bitmapped image format TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners TIFF images make use of tags keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file This flexible and platform independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications Toner Cartridge A kind of bottle or container within a machine like a printer which contains toner Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers which forms the text and images on the printed paper Toner can be fused by the heat of the fuser causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper TWAIN An industry standard for scanners and software By using a TWAIN compliant scanner with a TWAIN compliant program a scan can be initiated from within the program an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems UNC Path Uniform Naming Convention UNC is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products The format of a UNC path is lt servername gt lt sharename gt lt A
163. e settings for each print job change it in Printing Preferences Setting your machine as a default machine 1 Click the Windows Start menu 2 For Windows 2000 select Settings gt Printers For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes For Windows 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers 3 Select your machine 4 Right click your machine and select Set as Default Printer For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 If Set as default printer item has B mark you can select other Printing_ 8 printer drivers connected with selected printer Printing to a file PRN You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file To create a file 1 Check the Print to file box at the Print window aaa An General Select Printer Status Ready Pint to fig Location Comment Find Printer Printer Page Range All Number of copies 1 e a 3 3 ce GpH 2 Click Print 3 Type in the destination path and the file name and then click OK For example c Temp file name iY If you type in only the file name the file is automatically saved in My Documents Using the job accounting option This option allows you to print with the given permission 1 Install the driver See Installing U
164. e starts to scan and send a fax to destinations Po gt Sending faxes on both sides of paper Z This is available only when you load originals into the document feeder You can set the machine to send faxes on both sides of paper 1 Press ps Fax on the control panel 2 Place originals face up in the document feeder Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the scanner lid 3 Press Duplex on the control panel 4 Press the up down arrow until the binding option you want highlights Off Send faxes in normal mode e2 Side Send faxes on both sides of the original 2 gt 1Side ROT2 Send faxes on both sides of the original and prints each one on a separate sheet but the information on the back side of the printout is rotated 180 5 Press OK to save your selection Receiving a fax This part explains how to receive a fax and the special receiving methods available Changing the receive modes Your machine is preset to Copy mode at the factory however you can change the default so fax is priority See Changing the default mode on page 2 When you receive a fax the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically receives the fax But if you want to change the Fax mode to another mode follow the steps below 1 Press amp Fax on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax Setup
165. e sure that it is securely latched Be careful not to pinch your fingers 2 Press the green release handle to release the paper transfer belt Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt lift it out of the machine 3 Remove the jammed paper by pulling in the direction shown To avoid A If the scan unit is not completely closed the machine will not operate If you do not see the jammed paper or if there is any resistance when you pull stop and go to the next step 12 Open the rear cover and carefully take the jammed paper out of the machine 13 Close the rear cover tearing the paper pull it out gently and slowly Troubleshooting_ 7 4 Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt align it with the slots on the inside of the front door 5 Lower the paper transfer belt until it is parallel with the front door and firmly seated 6 Close the front door to resume printing A If the front door is not completely closed the machine will not operate Understanding display messages job again If the problem persists call for service eWhen you call for service provide the service representative with the contents of display message and the serial number Some messages may not appear in the display depending on options or models e aaa indicates the error code When you contact the service center this error code help to
166. e written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence Regulatory information_ 9 China only AGA YNA o G R tf wins sam za Pb Ho Cd crt PBB PBDE pL m N18 El hil FEL ESBE PCA a o 15 5 15 18 18 X X w ho fe e fe fe fo T katan x e b be o lo awm fx lo lo lo lo lo saat eco x x lo lo lo lo mome x lo lo lo lo lo omeen lx lo lo lo lo Pe O RRNA EA DALE ATE A BI ADB PE NI KEI FE SJ T 11363 2006 PERE AY Bt Be EDF o X NAA WA ERB EZ EI A OB IN FZ B
167. e your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the document size This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document mg Printing 4 gt To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 Click the Paper tab Select the paper size you want from the Fit to Page Select the Size Source and Type in Paper Options Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window moe pN Using watermarks The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document For example you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document N NY cS There are several predefined watermarks that come with the machine They can be modified or you can add new ones to the list Using an existing watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 Click the Advanced tab and select the desired watermark from the Watermark drop down list You will see the selected watermark in the preview image 3 Click OK or Print until you exit the print window Creating a watermark 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2
168. eaks r gt This could result in electric shock or fire C AN Caution When moving the machine turn the power off and S disconnect all cords then lift the machine with at least two people gt The machine could fall causing human injury or machine damage Do not place the machine on an unstable surface gt The machine could fall causing human injury or machine damage The machine should be connected to O the power level which is specified on the label gt If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using contact the electrical utility company Q Use only No 26 AWG or larger telephone line cord if Q necessary gt Otherwise it can cause damage to the machine a AWG American Wire Gauge Maintenance Checking Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight location such as a closet gt If the machine is not well ventilated this could result in fire Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical outlet gt Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords gt This can diminish performance and could result in electric shock or fire Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe operation If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters 79 with a 140V machine then the gauge should be 16 AWG or larger gt Otherwise it can cause damage to the ma
169. ecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications Its main tasks include standardization allocation of the radio spectrum and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls A T out of ITU T indicates telecommunication ITU T No 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU T for document facsimile transmissions JBIG Joint Bi level Image Experts Group JBIG is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality which was designed for Glossary_ 3 compression of binary images particularly for faxes but can also be used on other images JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web LDAP The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP IP LED A Light Emitting Diode LED is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine MAC address Media Access Control MAC address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter MAC address is a unique 48 bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs e g 00 00 0c 34 11 4e This address is usually hard cod
170. ed at a specified time immediately In this case the job currently printing is stopped and the selected job will be printed This function is available when the job is scheduled for later printing 7 When Yes appears press OK Form file Form overlay are images stored in the printer hard disk drive HDD as a special file format that can be printed in layers on any document Creating new form files Use the steps below to create a new form overlay 1 Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a new form file 2 To save the document as a form file access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 3 Click the Advanced tab and select Advanced 4 In the Advanced Output Options window check Save as Form for Overlay 5 Click Search 6 Type a file name of up to eight characters in the File name box Select the destination path and click Save 7 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window 8 A confirm message appears click Yes to save The file is not printed Instead it is stored on your computer hard disk drive IZ If you click NO the machine prints your form without saving 9 A confirm message appears click Yes to save l4 The form file size must be the same as the document you print with the form file Using form files on your machine s hard disk 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK 3 Press t
171. ed into a Network Interface Card NIC by its manufacturer and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks MFP Multi Function Peripheral MFP is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body so as to have a printer a copier a fax a scanner and etc MH Modified Huffman MH is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU T T 4 MH is a codebook based run length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space As most faxes consist mostly of white space this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes MMR Modified Modified READ MMR is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 6 Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information MR Modified Read MR is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 4 MR encodes the first scanned line using MH The next line is compared to the first the differences determined and then the differences are encoded and transmitted NetWare A network operating system developed by Novell Inc It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack Today NetWare supports TCP IP as well as IPX SPX OPC Org
172. een printed Graphics are scanned more slowly than text Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting It will help to increase the speed For details about how to set BIOS refer to your computer user s guide The original does not feed into the machine Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly Check that the original is the right size not too thick or thin Make sure that the document feeder is firmly closed The document feeder rubber pad may need to be replaced Contact a service representative Faxes are not received automatically The receiving mode should be set to fax Make sure that there is paper in the tray Check to see if the display shows any error message If it does clear the problem The machine does not send Make sure that the original is loaded in the document feeder or on the scanner glass Check the fax machine you are sending to to see if it can receive your fax Message appears on your computer screen e Device can t be set to the H W mode you want e Port is being used by another program e Port is Disabled e Scanner is busy e receiving or printing data When the current job is completed try again e Invalid handle e Scanning has failed There may
173. efault dynamic host configuration 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press up down arrow to highlight Network and press OK 3 Press up down arrow to highlight TCP IP IPv6 and press OK 4 Press up down arrow to highlight DHCPv6 Config and press OK 5 Press up down arrow to access the required value Routers Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router DHCPv6 Addresses Always use DHCPVv6 regardless of router request DHCPv6 Off Never use DHCPV6 regardless of router request 6 Press OK Manual address configuration 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL See Connecting SyncThru Web Service on page 7 iY For IPv4 enter the IPv4 address http xxx xxx xxx xxXx in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go 2 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website A log in page appears 3 Type in the ID and Password then click Login If it s your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service type in the below default ID and password ID admin Password sec00000 4 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens click Settings gt Network Settings 5 Click TCP IPv6 6 Enable the Manual Address In the TCP IPv6 section iY IPv6 Protocol should enable 7 Select the Address Prefix and click the Add button then the router prefix will automatically be entered into the address field Enter the rest of address ex 3FFE 10 88
174. electric shock and injury to persons CAUTION CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM DANGER LASER RADIATION AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM DANGER RADIATIONS INVISIBLES DU LASER EN CAS D OUVERTURE EVITER TOUTE EXPOSITION DIRECTE AU FAISCEAU VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN ATTENZIONE RADIAZIONE LASER INVISIBILE IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO PRECAUCION RADIACION LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO PERIGO RADIAGAO LASER INVISIVEL AO ABRIR EVITE EXPOSICAO DIRECTA AO FEIXE GEVAAR ONZICHTBARE LASERSTRALEN BIJ GEOPENDE KLEP DEZE KLEP NIET OPENEN ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTRALNING VED ABNING UNDGA UDSAETTELSE FOR STRALNING ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DEKSEL APNES UNNGA EKSPONERING FOR STRALEN VARNING OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL AR OPPEN STRALEN AR FARLIG VAROITUS NAKYMATONTA LASERSATEILYA AVATTAESSA VARO SUORAA ALTISTUMISTA SATEELLE t 6 P Math NAA J 9 0 HHS AH dol ABO Bel Your FASKA Taiwan only CENA HS FARA Bora PRESSE EHI PAETE ENE T SES ROR PRA IS ATE Regulatory information_ 1 Ozone Safety advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area EF During normal operation this machine produces ozone The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator However it is If you need additional information about
175. enter the incorrect password Invalid Password appears Reenter the correct password 6 Press the up down arrow to highlight the desired setting and press OK e Print You can print a stored job Delete You can delete a stored job 7 When Yes appears press OK Controlling the active job queue All of the print jobs waiting to be printed are listed in the active job queue in the order you sent them to the printer You can delete a job from the queue before printing or promote a job to print sooner 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Job Management and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Active Job and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow to highlight the user s name and file name you want use and press OK iY If the select file is a confidential print job enter the specified 4 digit password Use the up down arrow to enter digits and use the left right arrow to move between digits When you finnish entering the password press OK If you enter the incorrect password Invalid Password appears Reenter the correct password 6 Press the up down arrow to highlight the desired setting and press OK Cancel You can delete a file from the queue Promote You can select a job waiting in the active job queue and change its print order so that it can be printed sooner Release You can print a job scheduled to be print
176. entering the first letters of the name associated with the number Searching sequentially through the memory 1 Press ps Fax on the control panel 2 Press Address Book on the control panel 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Search amp Dial and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Group Dial and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow to highlight All and press OK 6 Press the up down arrow until the name and number you want highlights You can search upwards or downwards through the entire memory in alphabetical order Searching sequentially through the memory 1 Press amp Fax on the control panel 2 Press Address Book on the control panel 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Search amp Dial and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Group Dial and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow to highlight Search ID and press OK 6 Enter the first few letters of the name you want 7 Press the up down arrow until the group dial s name and number you want highlights Deleting a Address Book for entry 1 Press ps Fax on the control panel 2 Press Address Book on the control panel 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Delete and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow until the deleting option you want is highlighted and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow until the searching method you want highlights and press OK Select Search All to search for an entry by scanning through all entries in Address
177. equired as a result of using non genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty e f the machine stops printing replace the toner cartridge See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 Message Meaning Suggested solutions ccc toner Not Installed ccc toner cartridge is not installed Install it The toner cartridge is not installed or the CRUM Consumer Replaceable Unit Monitor in the cartridge is not properly connected Reinstall the toner cartridge two or three times If the problem persists the toner cartridge is not being detected Call for service ccc Toner Not Installed ccc Toner is not installed Remove seal tape amp reinstall The machine cannot detect a toner cartridge Remove the sealing tape from the toner cartridge Refer to Quick Install Guide Group Not Available You have tried to select a group location number where only a single location number can be used such as when adding locations for a multiple send operation Use a speed dial number or dial number manually using the number keypad Data Read Fail Check USB Memory Time expired while reading date Try again Data Write Fail Check USB Memory Storing to the USB memory failed Check the available USB memory space Door is open The door is not securely Close the door until it Close it latched locks into place
178. er 1 Press ps Fax on the control panel 2 Press Address Book on the control panel 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight New 8 Edit and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Speed Dial and press OK 5 Enter a speed dial number between 1 and 240 and press OK If an entry is already stored in the number you choose the display shows the message to allow you to change it To start over with another speed dial number press Back 6 Enter the name you want and press OK For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters see Entering characters using the number keypad on page 2 7 Enter the fax number you want and press OK 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Editing speed dial numbers 1 Press ps Fax on the control panel 2 Press Address Book on the control panel 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight New amp Edit and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Speed Dial and press OK 5 Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK 6 Change the name and press OK 7 Change the fax number and press OK 8 Change the name and press OK 9 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Using speed dial numbers When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a fax enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you want For a one digit 0 9 speed dial number press and hold the corresponding digit button on the number keypad For a two or three digit s
179. er the setting the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a document Color Mode You can set the color options Setting to Color typically produces the best possible print quality for color documents If you want to print a color document in grayscale select Grayscale BlackOptimization allows you to print in high quality black If you use this option it might take longer to print Advanced Page Color Setting This option allows you to print some pages in color and other pages in mono within a document For example if you want to print pages 1 4 in color and you have chosen Grayscale in the Graphic tab select Color then type in 1 4 Job Accounting This option allows you to print with the given permission User permission If you check this option only users with user permission can start a print job Group permission If you check this option only groups with group permission can start a print job IZ elf you want to encrypt job accounting password refer to help 7 on the bottom left coner of the printer properties pane Printing_ 9 eAdministrators can enable job accounting and configure permissions in SyncThru Web Admin Service Job Setting CLX 6250 Series only This option allows you to choose how to print the printing file by using the 512 MB optional memory or Hard disk Store Spool Normal and Print Schedule mode is availabl
180. et manually This is called a static IP and is often required in corporate Intranets for security reasons e DHCP IP assignment Connect your machine to the network and wait a few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the machine Then print the Network Configuration Report as explained above If the report shows that the IP address has changed the assignment was successful You will see the new IP address in the report e Static IP assignment Use the SetlP program to change the IP address from your computer If your machine has a control panel you can also change the IP address using the machine s control panel In an office environment we recommend that you contact a network administrator to set this address for you IPv4 setting using control panel 1 Connect your machine to the network with an network cable 2 Turn on the machine 3 Press Menu on the control panel 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Network and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow to highlight TCP IP IPv4 and press OK 6 Press the up down arrow to highlight Static and press OK 7 Press the up down arrow to highlight IP Address and press OK 8 Enter the IP address using numeric keypad and press OK 9 Enter other parameters such as the Subnet Mask and Gateway and press OK 10 After entering all parameters press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Now go to Installing network connected machine s driver on page 3 IPv4 setting using
181. etup You can receive emails about your machine s status by setting this option By setting information such as IP address host name e mail address and SMTP server information the machine status toner cartridge shortage or machine error will be sent to a certain person s e mail automatically This option may be used more frequently by a machine administrator 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows Enter the machine IP address http xxx xxx xxx xxx in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go 2 Your machine s embedded website opens 3 From the Settings tab select Machine Settings 5 E mail Notification Y If you haven t configured outgoing server environment go to Settings gt Network Settings gt Outgoing Mail Server SMTP to configure network environment before setting e mail notification 4 Click Add button to add e mail notification user Set the recipient name and e mail address es with notification items you want to receive an alert for 5 Click Apply i If the firewall is activated the e mail may not be sent successfully In that case contact the a network administrator Setting the system administrator information Set the the system administrator information This setting is necessary for using the e mail notification option 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows Enter the machine IP address http xxx xxx xxx xxx in the address field an
182. etwork or USB and powered on 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive eThe software CD should automatically run and an installation window appears elf the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive Click OK elf you use Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start gt All programs gt Accessories gt Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive and click OK elf the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control windows elf the AutoPlay window appears in Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Yes in the User Account Control windows 3 Select Administrator Installation gt Remote Installation If necessary select a language from the drop down list 4 Read License Agreement and select accept the terms of the License Agreement Then click Next 5 Select Client Group window appears 6 Click New Group To use remote installation you need at least a group If you have already created a group load the group you want and go to step 16 eEdit Group You can edit groups eLoad Group You can load groups Delete Group You can delete groups 7 Log on window appears Select Domain Re
183. event the paper mismatch between tray and the printer driver For example if you have A4 paper in the tray but you set the paper size to Letter in the printer driver the machine prints on A4 paper and vice versa This option only works for mismatch between A4 and Letter paper Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Paper Substitution and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight On and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode or ot a GOD Net accounting This is the option limits the number of use for fax printer copy and scan First the administrator needs to install the Job account Plug in from SyncThru Web Admin Service Then create user accounts by entering user ID and Password in SyncThru Web Admin Service If you are not registered request Administrator for a registration 1 Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Net Accounting and press OK Press the up down arrow until the setting option you want appears eProtect Select the option for which you want to enable or disable net accounting Change Password The access password code can be changed 6 Press OK to save the selection
184. ext 8 When the add printer is done click Finish UNIX To use UNIX Printer Driver you have to install the UNIX printer driver package first then setup the printer You can download the UNIX Printer Driver package from the Samsung website Network setup_ 5 Installing the UNIX printer driver package Installation procedure is common for all variants of UNIX OS mentioned See UNIX on page 3 1 From the Samsung website download and unpack the UNIX Printer Driver package to your computer 2 Acquire root privileges SU 3 Copy appropriate driver archive to the target UNIX computer See administration guide of your UNIX OS for details 4 Unpack the UNIX printer driver package archive For example on IBM AIX use the following commands cd tmp gzip dc cdrom unix packages aix_power aix_power tar gz tar xvf The binaries folder consists of binz install share files and folders 5 Copy the binaries folder to any local folder 6 Change to the driver s binaries directory cd aix_power binaries 7 Run the install script install install is the installer script file which is used to install or uninstall the UNIX Printer Driver package Use chmod 755 install command to give the permission to the installer script 8 Execute the install c command to verify install results 9 Run installprinter from the command line This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window Setup the pri
185. f Screen mode from the printer Normal This mode will generate printouts with smooth tone over the entire page Enhanced This mode will generate printouts with sharp texts and smooth graphic photo objects in the page eDetailed This mode will generate printouts with sharp details over the entire page 4 Select OK Enhancing glossiness Windows only You can enhance the glossiness of the printout by using this feature Z eYou can only print on one side of paper with this option elf you use this option it might take longer to print 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 Click the Basic tab 3 Check Glossy Printing in Quality 4 Select OK Postscript options gt Printing Preferences Basic Paper Graphics Advanced Samsung Color Mode Ot 8 50 x 11 00 inches inch y O Grayscale op Black Optimization Fork Text Darken Text Normal Al Text Black Graphic Controller Fine Edge Toner Save No Saving Maximum Saving PostScript Options if The following windows may differ depending on your operating system printer models or the application you are using Following options are only supported on the Post Script driver Open the Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 Then click Graphic tab gt PostScript Options e Output Opti
186. ferences click Paper tab and set type to Thick See Opening printing preferences on page 2 e f these steps do not correct the problem contact a service representative Condition Suggested Solutions Light or faded print If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page the toner supply is low You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge life See Redistributing toner on page 1 If this does not improve the print quality install a new toner cartridge The paper may not meet paper specifications for example the paper may be too moist or rough See Print media specifications on page 3 If the entire page is light the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save mode off See the help screen of the printer driver A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning See Cleaning the inside on page 2 The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty See Cleaning the inside on page 2 White Spots If white spots appear on the page e The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a paper falls to the inner devices within the machine so the transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine See Cleaning the inside on page 2 e The paper path may need cleaning See Cleaning the inside on page 2 Vertical lines
187. ff while traveling in an airplane IEEE 802 11 also known as wireless Ethernet and Bluetooth communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless communication In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful the option to use a wireless device may be restricted or eliminated Airports Hospitals and Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices Since your system is equipped with a wireless device when traveling between countries with your system check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of a wireless device in the destination country shields are in place and the system is fully assembled Wireless devices are not user serviceable Do not modify them in any way Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to A If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and A use it Contact manufacturer for service A Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used See
188. first time logging into SyncThru Web Service type in the below default ID and password ID admin Password sec00000 5 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens click Settings gt Network Settings gt Restore Default 6 Click Clear for network 7 Turn off and restart machine to apply settings Installing network connected machine s driver You must install the printer driver software for printing The software includes drivers applications and other user friendly programs Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed All applications should be closed on your computer before beginning installation Windows This is recommended for most users All components necessary for machine operations will be installed Follow the steps below 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive The software CD should automatically run and an installation window appear elf the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive Click OK elf you use Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start gt All programs gt Accessories gt Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive and click OK elf the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008
189. fy a network printer that is located over subnet then specify IP address of network printer directly l4 If you can t search network printers on the network then check whether your firewall setting is disabled If it is enabled disable firewall temporarily and try searching again Set Printer Drivers window appears Click Next If necessary configure printer name sharing shared name and default printer setting If you changed settings then you should click Apply button to apply changes then click Next Summary window appears Check the package information and click Next to start creating the setup package You can modify the package configuration by clicking the Back button 4 Check the Install the package as silent mode if you want to make the installation package as a silent installation package Silent installation installs the driver automatically by the set option without user intervention When creating the setup package is finished Packaging Completed window appears Check Open package folder upon completion if you want the created package to open automatically after it s created Click Finish Creating a setup script file You can generate setup configuration script file based on the CD image It can be used with Silent installation for distributing software to multiple client computers For example you can upload a full CD setup files into a file server then distribute batch file or log on script file that execute
190. g properly eProperties Allows you to view and change the printer properties 1 Switches to Scanners configuration 2 Shows all of the installed scanners 3 Shows the vendor model name and type of your scanner Management tools 5 e Properties Allows you to change the scan properties and scan a document Ports configuration In this window you can view the list of available ports check the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner has terminated the job for any reason SS S anampo Aewmip dami scenes B amp B FB VL soot Em demis idevimipe Idevimip7 Heip dami down dowmip10 Ahret Port la umumpd Switches to Ports configuration Shows all of the available ports oVos Shows the port type device connected to the port and status e Refresh Renews the available ports list e Release port Releases the selected port Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners Your machine may be connected to a host computer via a parallel port or USB port Since the machine device contains more than one device printer and scanner it is necessary to organize proper access of consumer applications to these devices via the single I O port The Unified Linux Driver package provides an appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung printer and scanner drivers The drivers talk to their devices via so
191. g edge for the document The image can be adjusted up or down on the page and or shifted to the right or left l4 The Margin Shift feature can either be used for scanner glass or document feeder depending on the set up eAuto Center Scanner glass Custom Margin Scanner glass Document feeder 1 Press KS COPY on the control panel 2 Place originals face up in the document feeder Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the scanner lid Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Margin Shift and press OK m p Har iko Off Does not use this feature Auto Center Automatically copy in the center of the paper Custom Margin Enter the left right top bottom margin using Number keypad Press the up down arrow until the binding option you want is highlighted 7 Press OK 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode 9 Press Start to begin copying Edge erase copying Edge erase allows you to erase spots drill holes fold creases and staple marks along any of the four edges of a document iH The Edge Erase feature can either be used for scanner glass or document feeder depending on the set up Small Original Scanner glass Hole Punch Scanner glass Document feeder eBook Center Scanner glass Border Erase Scanner glass Document feeder 1 Press KS COPY on
192. g to the network you select WLAN security encryption type will be WEP or WPA ein case of WEP Press the up down to selcet Open System or SharedKey Open System Authentication is not used and Encryption may or may not be used depending on the need for data security Enter the WEP Key using number keypad after selecting Open System SharedKey Authentication is used A device that has a proper WEP Key can access the network Enter the WEP Key using number keypad after selecting SharedKey eIn case of WPA Enter the WPA Key using number keypad The Key length should be between 8 to 63 characters long 5 Press OK 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Z eSSID SSID Service Set Identifier is a name that identifies a wireless network Access points and wireless devices attempting to connect to a specific wireless network must use the same SSID The SSID is case sensitive WEP WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64 bit or 128 bit WEP encryption key WPA WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key that changes automatically at regular intervals WPA also uses TKIP Temporal Key Integrity Protocol and AES Advanced Encryption Standard for data encryption Custom mode 1 Enter the SSID when Edit SSID appears on the top line of the display the
193. ge e Setting the date and time e Changing the clock mode e Changing the default mode e Setting sounds e Entering characters using the number keypad e Using the power saving mode Altitude adjustment The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level The following information will guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality of print Before you set the altitude value determine the altitude where you are 13 123 ft 3 000 m fy eee 9 842 ft 2000 _ Waaa 1 High 3 6 561 ft 2 High 2 oy Waa mg 3 High 1 4 i 4 Normal In the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Altitude Adjust and press OK Press the up down arrow until the setting option you want appears Press OK to save the selection Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode SE a In the computer 1 Double click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar or Notification Area in Linux You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X See Understanding Smart Panel on page 2 Or if you are a Windows user you can launch it from the Start menu select Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt your printer
194. ge Packed 20 to 40 C 4 to 104 F Humidity Operation 20 to 80 RH Storage Packed 10 to 90 RH a Sound Pressure Level ISO 7779 Configuration tested machine basic installation A4 paper simplex printing Electrical specifications A Power requirements are based on the country region where the device is sold Do not convert operating voltages Doing so might damage the device and void the product warranty Item Description Power rating 110 volt models AC 110 127 V 220 volt models AC 220 240 V Specifications 1 Item Description Power consumption Average operating mode e CLX 6220 Series e CLX 6250 Series Less than 550 W Less than 580 W Ready mode e CLX 6220 Series e CLX 6250 Series Less than 33 W Less than 38 W Power save mode e CLX 6220 Series e CLX 6250 Series Less than 11 W Less than 13 W Power off mode Less than 1 W a See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage frequency hertz and type of current for your machine Specifications 2 Print media specifications Type Size l l Print media weight Capacity Dimensions tray1 optional tray multi purpose tray Plain paper Letter 216 x279 mm 8 5 x 11 inches 70 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ibs bond 70 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ibs bond Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches e 250 sheets
195. gher priority in scanning Setting the fax header In some countries you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send Press amp Fax on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Machine ID and press OK Oa CO PO TS 6 Enter your name or the company name using the number keypad You can enter alphanumeric characters using the number keypad and include special symbols by pressing the 1 button For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters see Entering characters using the number keypad on page 2 Press OK to save the ID Press the up down arrow to highlight Machine Fax No and press OK Enter your fax number using the number keypad and press OK 0 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode ee a Sending a fax 1 Press ps Fax on the control panel Q 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs See Adjusting the document settings on page 6 4 Enter the receiving fax machine s number You can use speed dial numbers or group dial numbers For details about storing and searching for a number see Setting up address book on page 7 5 Press Start on the con
196. guides USB memory port Toner cartridges Front door handle Paper transfer belt Multi purpose tray handle Scanner lid Paper level indicator OG B CE O FH Gd BG BG Scanner lock switch Introduction 1 a Optional device Rear view Extension telephone socket Control board cover EXT Rear door 1 a 3 Cable organizer a 5 6 Telephone line socket Optional tray 2 cable connector Power receptacle Network port USB port Power switch BIBIGIOIONO Handle IEEE 802 11 b g Wireless LAN a Optional device Introduction_ 2 Control panel overview eS 00 Q ae 05 a o E 9 Q 3 eee eee eee eee SO ID Copy You can copy both sides of an ID Card such as a driver s license to a single side of paper See ID card copying on page 2 Direct USB Allows you to directly print files stores on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine See About USB memory device on page 1 Duplex Allows you to print documents on both sides of the paper Display screen Shows the current status and prompts during an operation Toner colors Show the status of each toner cartridge Status Shows the status of your machine See Understanding the Status LED on page 5 Ac
197. h scanning e Linux scanning Scanning originals and sending through email Scan to Email You can scan the originals and email the scanned image to several destinations from the machine by email Setting up an email account To scan and send an image as an email attachment you need to set up network parameters using SyncThru Web Service 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser 3 Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website A log in page appears 5 Type in the ID and Password then click Login If it s your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service type in the below default ID and password ID admin Password sec00000 6 Click Settings gt Network Settings and Outgoing Mail Server SMTP Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name 8 Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 25 9 Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require authentication 10 Enter the SMTP server login name and password 11 Click Apply iH If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3 before SMTP put a check mark of SMTP Requires POP3 Before SMTP Authentication a Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name b Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port n
198. handle the problem e ccc indicates the part of the each toner cartridge e xxx indicates the media type e zzz indicates the paper size e yyy indicates the tray Message Meaning Suggested solutions ccc toner cart The toner cartridge is Open and close the error wrong installed front door and check Error aaa that the toner cartridge s Open Close Door are installed correctly If the problem persists call for service Prepare new ccc Small amount of toner is Prepare a new cartridge toner left in the cartridge The for replacement You Prepare new ccc estimated cartridge life of may temporarily toner cartridge toner is close increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner See Redistributing toner on page 1 Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine s status or errors Some error messages are shown with graphics to aid you in troubleshooting Checking display messages 1 When errors occur Check Error appears on the display and press OK 2 Check the display message to see what kind of error has occurred If several messages appear press the up down arrow to highlight the message you want solve 3 Press OK on the control panel Refer to the tables below to understand the messages and their meaning and solve the problem using the suggested solutions Z elf Check Error still appears repeat above steps elf a message is not in the ta
199. he IP address or DNS name of the printer in the Device textbox for network connected printers On IBM AIX with jetdirect Queue type only DNS name is possible numeric IP address is not allowed 7 Queue type shows the connection as Ipd or jetdirect in the corresponding list box Additionally usb type is available on Sun Solaris OS 8 Select Copies to set the number of copies 9 Check the Collate option to receive copies already sorted 10 Check the Reverse Order option to receive copies in the reverse order 11 Check the Make Default option to set this printer as default 12 Click OK to add the printer IPv6 Configuration A TCP IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher K If the IPv6 network seems to not be working set all the network setting to the factory defaults and try again See Restoring factory default settings using SyncThru Web Service on page 3 To use the IPv6 network environment follow the next procedure to use the IPv6 address iP 2 3 4 5 6 2 Connect your machine to the network with a network cable Turn on the machine Print a Network Configuration Report from the machine s control panel that will check IPv6 addresses iY a Press Menu on the control panel b Press the up down arrow to highlight Network and press OK c Press the up down arrow to highlight Network Info and press OK Select Start gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers gt Add
200. he SmarThru Office program See Smarthru Office on page 3 System requirements Before you begin ensure that your system meets the following requirements Microsoft Windows Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems Requirement recommended OPERATING SYSTEM CPU RAM free HDD space Windows 2000 Intel Pentium II 400 64 MB 600 MB MHz Pentium III 933 128 MB MHz Windows XP Intel Pentium III 933 128 MB 1 5 GB MHz Pentium IV 1 GHz 256 MB Windows Intel Pentium IlI 933 128 MB 1 25 GB to Server 2003 MHz Pentium IV 1 GHz 512 MB 2 GB Windows Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz 512 MB 10 GB Server 2008 Pentium IV 2 GHz 2048 MB Windows Intel Pentium IV 3 GHz 512 MB 15 GB Vista 1024 MB Windows 7 Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz 1 GB 2 16 GB 32 bit or 64 bit processor GB or higher e Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory to enable the Aero theme e DVD R W Drive Windows Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz 512 MB 10 GB Server 2008 x86 or 1 4 GHz x64 2048 MB R2 processors 2 GHz or faster i eInternet Explorer 5 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems Administrator rights are required to install the software Windows Terminal Services is compatible with this machine Getting started_ 2 Macintosh Requirements recommended OPERAT
201. he machine prints multiple original images on a single page The number of images is automatically determined by the original image and the paper size This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass Press SG COPY on the control panel Place a single original face down on the scanner glass Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Layout and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Clone Copy and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Press Start to begin copying ONAARWN gt 4 You cannot adjust the copy size using Reduce Enlarge for the Clone Copy feature Book copying The Book Copy feature allows you to copy an entire book If the book is too thick lift the cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the cover If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm start copying with the cover open This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass Press SG Copy on the control panel Place a single original face down on the scanner glass Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Layout and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Book Copy and press OK aa 2 Y gt Copying_ 3 7 Press the up dow
202. he system label The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European Commission through the R amp TTE directive European States qualified under wireless approvals EU Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France with frequency restrictions Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Latvia Lithuania Luxembourg Malta The Netherlands Poland Portugal Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden and the U K EEA EFTA Iceland Liechtenstein Norway and Switzerland countries European States with restrictions on use EU In France the frequency range is restricted to 2446 5 2483 5 MHz for devices above 10 mW transmitting power such as wireless In Italiy if used outside of own premises general authorization is required In Russian only for indoor applications EEA EFTA No limitations at this time countries Regulatory information_ 7 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE STATEMENTS Wireless Guidance Low power Radio LAN type devices radio frequency RF wireless communication devices operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz Band may be present embedded in your printer system The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device Additional limitations cautions and concerns for specific countries are listed in the specific country sections or country group sections The wireless devices
203. he up down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Form Menu and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow until the item you want appears and press OK eOff Prints in normal mode Single Form Prints all page using the first form Double Form Prints the front page using the first form and the back page using the second form 6 Press Back 7 Press the up down arrow to highlight Select Form and press OK 8 Press the up down arrow until the item you want appears and press OK 9 Press the up down arrow until the form file for the second form appears and press OK File Policy You can choose the file policy for generating file name before you proceed with the job through hard disk drive HDD If the hard disk drive HDD memory already has the same name when you entered a new file name you can rename or overwrite it 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Job Management and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight File Policy and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow to highlight the desired setting and press OK eRename If the hard disk drive HDD memory already has the Supplies and accessories_ 9 same name when you enter a new file name the file will be saved as a different name that is automatically programmed eOverwrite You can set the machine to delete previo
204. heck its current status e Change TCP IP parameters and set up other network parameters e Change printer preference e Set the email notifications advising of the machine s status e Get support for using the machine To access SyncThru Web Service 1 Access a web browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows Enter the machine IP address http xxx xxx xxx xxx in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go 2 Your machine s embedded website opens Logging into SyncThru Web Service Before configuring options in SyncThru Web Service you need to log in as an administrator You can still use SyncThru Web Service without logging in but you won t have access to Settings tab and Security tab 1 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website A log in page appears 2 Type in the ID and Password then click Login If it s your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service type in the below default ID and password ID admin Password sec00000 SyncThru Web Service overview f Information Address Book Settings Security Maintenance e Smarthru Office e Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator Some tabs may not appear depending on your model Information tab This tab gives you general information about your machine You can check things such as the machine s IP address remaining amount of toner ethernet information firmware version and more You can als
205. hen on There is a problem in the machine Turn the machine off and turn it on again If the problem persists call for service Replace ccc toner Replace with new ccc Toner The toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifespan Replace the toner cartridge with a Samsung genuine toner cartridge See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 Mail Size Error One Page is Too Large Single page data exceeds the configured mail size Reduce the resolution and try again Replace Fuser unit Replace with new The fuser unit has reached the end of its This message appears when the fuser unit is Too many Faxes Too may faxes are received Print or remove job Too many faxes are received Print or remove received fax Too many Faxes Too may faxes are queued Wait or remove job Too many faxes are queued to be sent Cancel reserved fax in priority fax feature fuser unit lifespan worn Replace the fuser unit with a new one Call for service Retry Redial The machine is You can press OK to waiting for a specified time interval to redial a previously busy station immediately redial Stop Clear to cancel the redial operation TR belt Not installed Transfer belt unit is not installed The transfer belt is not installed Install a Samsung genuine transfer belt Scanner door Open Door of scanner is open Close it The scanner door is not se
206. hine s power is cut off you need to reset the correct time and date once the power has been restored Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Date amp Time and press OK Enter the correct time and date using up down left right arrow or numeric keypad Month 01 to 12 Day 01 to 31 Year requires four digits Hour 01 to 12 Minute 00 to 59 oe 2 NS Basic setup_ 1 6 Press OK to save the selection 7 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Changing the clock mode You can set your machine to display the current time using either a 12 hour or 24 hour format Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Clock Mode and press OK Press the up down arrow to select the other mode and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode eae Aa Changing the default mode Your machine is preset to Copy mode You can switch this default mode between Fax mode and Copy mode 1 Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Machine Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Default Mode and press OK
207. his section explains how to print using Macintosh You need to set the print environment before printing e USB connected See Macintosh on page 4 e Network connected See Macintosh on page 5 Printing a document When you print with a Macintosh you need to check the printer driver setting in each application you use Follow the steps below to print from a Macintosh 1 Open the document you want to print 2 Open the File menu and click Page Setup Document Setup in some applications 3 Choose your paper size orientation scaling other options and make sure that your machine is selected Click OK Settings Page Attributes H Format for Ha Paper Size A4 H 20 99 by 29 70 cm Orientation Scale 1100 PD Cancel ox 4 Open the File menu and click Print 5 Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you want to print 6 Click Print Changing printer settings You can use advanced printing features provided by your machine Open an application and select Print from the File menu The machine name which appears in the printer properties pane may differ depending on the machine in use Except for the name the composition of the printer properties pane is similar to the following l4 eThe setting options may differ depending on printers and Macintosh OS version eThe following panes may differ depending on your operating system or the application you are using
208. ife from your new Samsung toner cartridges Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions The toner cartridge should remain in its original unopened package until installation If original packaging is not available cover the top opening of the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf and operating life Do not store on the floor If the toner cartridge is removed from the printer always store the cartridge e Inside the protective bag from the original package e Store lying flat not standing on end with the same side facing up as if they were installed in the machine e Do not store consumables in Temperature greater than 40 C 104 F Humidity range less than 20 nor not greater than 80 An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature Direct sunlight or room light Dusty places A car for a long period of time An environment where corrosive gases are present An environment with salty air Handling instructions e Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge e Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock e Never manually rotate the drum especially in the reverse direction this can cause internal damage and toner spillage Use of non Samsung and refilled t
209. ify IP address of network printer directly 14 Confirm Group details window appears Check the group information and click Next Location to save the group shows the path of default folder which stores the created group information The group information file will be created as lt group_name gt RGI You can change the path by clicking the Change button 15 Select Client Group window appears again Administrator s Guide Windows only 1 16 Select the group s and click Next to start remote installation Remote installation begins you can see the installation status from the window 17 When installation is completed Results of remote installation window appears Check the result For failed client computers you can reinstall again by clicking the Reinstall button i For failed client computers you can check the log file which is created in the client computers Workgroup Remote Installation You can also use remote installation method with workgroups If your company has no domain network environment you should use Workgroup Remote Installation l4 If the client computer uses Windows Vista or higher ID should be Administrator 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to the network or USB and powered on 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive eThe software CD should automatically run and an installation window appears elf the installation window does not appear click Start and then
210. ight print on same sheet of paper Avoid using this feature when you are printing more than 1 copy Linux printing Printing from applications K The following windows may differ depending on your operating Printing_ 10 system printer models or the application you are using There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX Printing System CUPS You can print on your machine from any such application 1 Open an application and select Print from the File menu 2 Select Print directly using Ipr 3 In the LPR GUI window select the model name of your machine from the printer list and click Properties LPR GUI Copie 5 Copies 1 100 i 4 Ec mj Reverse All Pages 3 2 1 Enter page numbers and or groups of pages lo print separated by commas 1 2 5 10 12 17 4 Change the print job properties using the following four tabs displayed at the top of the window Properties General Text Graphics Advanced r Paper Options Paper Size Letter f Paper Type Printer Default if Paper Orientation z Double Sided Printing Portrait None w Landscape A 1 ee w Long Edge Book w Short Edge Tablet Banners Pages per Side N Up Start None 4 Normal 1 Up End None 4 v 2 Up w 4 Up General This option allows you to change the paper size the paper type and the orientation of the documents It enables the duplex feature ad
211. iginal document face down and closed the scanner lid 3 Press Duplex on the control panel 4 Press the up down arrow until the binding option you want is highlighted Off Scans in normal mode e2 Side Scans on both sides of the original 2 gt 1Side ROT2 Scans on both sides of the original and prints each one on a separate sheet but the information on the back side of the printout is rotated 180 5 Press OK to save your selection Scanning with TWAIN enabled software If you want to scan documents using other software you will need to use TWAIN compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop Follow the steps below to scan with TWAIN compliant software 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 1 3 Open an application such as Adobe Photoshop Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options 5 Scan and save your scanned image gt Scanning using the WIA driver Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition WIA driver for scanning images WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft Windows XP and works with digital cameras and scanners Unlike the TWAIN driver the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily adjust images without using additional software Z The WIA driver works only on Windows XP Vista 7 wi
212. igned to support all of your document needs from printing and copying to more advanced networking solutions for your business Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on models or countries Features by models include FEATURES CLX 6220 Series CLX 6250 Series USB 2 0 o USB Memory Interface 6 Document Feeder o Hard Disk O Network Interface Ethernet 10 100 BaseTX wired LAN 8 Network Interface 802 11 b g wireless LAN O Duplex 2 sided printing FAX 8 8 Optional Tray 2 O o a Depending on your country wireless LAN cards may not be available Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought your printer e Included o Optional Blank Not available Features of your new product 2 introduction This chapter gives you an overview of your machine This chapter includes Machine overview Control panel overview Machine overview Understanding the Status LED Introducing the useful buttons Front view h B mah a PA h h OJfj Document feeder cover Front door 9 Optional tray 2 Scanner glass Document feeder width guides Document output tray Tray 1 Scan unit Document feeder input tray Control panel 11 Multi purpose tray 8 GG Inner cover of the reverse unit Document feeder output tray Multi purpose tray paper width
213. iguration has the two tabs Printers and Classes The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes Unified Driver Configurator Printers tab View the current system s printer configuration by clicking on the machine icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window Untied Driver Configurator Selected printer Local prnieriidie Model URI Shows all of the machine classes 2 Shows the status of the class and the number of machines in the class 1 Switches to Printers configuration Refresh Renews the classes list Add Class Allows you to add a new machine class 2 Shows all of the installed machine Remove Class Removes the selected machine class 3 Shows the status model name and URI of your machine Scanners configuration The printer control buttons are as follows In this window you can monitor the activity of scanner devices view a list of Refresh Renews ihe available machineslist installed Samsung machine devices change device properties and scan f i images Add Printer Allows you to add a new machines 9 Unified Driver Conn quratar Remove Printer Removes the selected machine ad Nini Pada GT Set as Default Sets the current selected machine as a default machine eStop Start Stops starts the machine Test Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is workin
214. il 1 Press amp Fax on the control panel 2 Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Email and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Receive Forward and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been completed select Forward amp Print Enter your email address and press OK Enter the email address to which faxes are to be sent and press OK 10 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Subsequent received faxes will be forwarded to the specified email addresses NOOR Go o o Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a Server When you forward a fax to FTP or SMB server you must first set the server in SyncThru Web Service See Setting up an FTP server on page 4 or Setting up an SMB server on page 4 You can forward a fax to a total of five destinations via the SMB or FTP Press amp Fax on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Server and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Send Forward and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight On and press OK Press Stop C
215. in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name For Mac OS X 10 4 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model For Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 if Auto Select does not work properly select Select a driver to use and your machine name in Print Using Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the default machine 18 Click Add if If the printer driver does not work properly uninstall the driver and reinstall it Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh a Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on b Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive c Double click CD ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop d Double click the MAC_Installer folder e Double click the Installer OS X icon f Enter the password and click OK g The Samsung Installer window opens Click Continue h Select Uninstall and click Uninstall i When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears Click Continue j When the uninstall is done click Quit Linux You need to download the Linux software package from the Samsung website to install the printer software Follow the steps below to install the software Installing the Linux Unified Driver 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 When the Administrator Login window appears type in
216. in various sizes See Print media specifications on page 3 Create professional documents Windows only e Print Watermarks You can customize your documents with words such as Confidential See Using watermarks on page 5 e Print Posters The text and pictures of each page of your document are magnified and printed across the sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form a poster See Printing posters on page 3 e You can use preprinted forms with plain paper See Using overlay PCL driver only on page 5 Save time and money e To save paper you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper See Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper on page 3 e This machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use e To save paper you can print on both sides of the paper double sided printing See Printing on both sides of paper on page 4 Expand your machine s capacity e Your machine has an extra memory slot to expand the memory See Available accessories on page 2 e Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3 PS enables PS printing lt 2 PI Sun nunn COO ami rg e LA ko TA mm C7 TU Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3 Copyright 1995 2005 Zoran Corporation All rights reserved Zoran the Zoran logo IPS PS3 and Onelmage are trademarks of Zoran Corporation 136 PS3 fo
217. ings on page 8 Click Default to restore the default setting for the scan options When you have finished click Scan to start scanning The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to show you the progress of the scan To cancel scanning click Cancel The scanned image appears If you want to edit the scanned image use the toolbar See Using the Image Manager on page 9 When you are finished click Save on the toolbar Select the file directory where you want to save the image and enter the file name 13 Click Save Adding Job Type Settings You can save your scan option settings for later use Scanning 8 To save a new Job Type setting 1 Change the options from the Scanner Properties window 2 Click Save As 3 Enter the name for your setting 4 Click OK Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop down list To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job 1 Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop down list 2 The next time you open the Scanner Properties window the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan job To delete a Job Type setting 1 Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type drop down list 2 Click Delete The setting is deleted from the list Using the Image Manager The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and tools to edit your scanned image Use the following tools to edit the image
218. instance this could be an attempt to print a document when the port is claimed by a scanning application Ensure the port is not busy Since functional components of machine printer and scanner share the same I O interface port the situation of simultaneous access of different user applications to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device The other user will encounter device busy response You should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your machine In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application If this is the case you should either wait for completion of the current job or press the Release port button if you are sure that the present application is not functioning properly Check if your application has special print option such as oraw If oraw is specified in the command line parameter then remove it to print properly For Gimp front end select print gt Setup printer and edit command line parameter in the command item The CUPS Common UNIXPrinting System version distributed with SUSE Linux 9 2 cups 1 1 21 has a problem with ipp Internet Printing Protocol printing Use the socket printing instead of ipp or install a later version of CUPS cups 1 1 22 or higher Some color images come out all black This is a known bug in Ghostscript u
219. ion path should be a fully qualified path Since machine drivers should be installed on the OS specific location this command applies to only application software Command command Definition Description ine lo or Opens Printers and Faxes This command will open O folder after installation Printers and Faxes folder after the silent installation f lt log Specifies log filename It will create a log file to a filename or The default log file is specified folder F lt log created in the system temp filename folder if not specified Ih H or Shows Command line Usage Language code li Definition Description ine i lt script Specifies customized install 8 Customized script file can filename or script file for custom be assigned for customized I lt script operation silent installation This script filename gt eo file can be created or 4 ia So eee modified through provided uld be a fully l w a qualified filename installer customizing utility or by text editor Note This customized script file is prior than default installer setting in setup package but not prior than command line parameters n lt Printer Specifies printer name With this parameter you name gt or Printer instance shall be can add printer instances as N lt Printer created as specified printer your wishes name gt name
220. ion quality by using the Micro filter The Micro filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection quality or Internet quality Since the DSL Micro filter is not provided with the machine contact your Internet Service provider for use on DSL Micro filter 1 Line port 2 Micro filter 3 DSL modem Telephone line Preparing to fax Before you send a fax you need to connect the supplied line cord to the wall jack Refer to the Quick Install Guide how to make a connection The method of making a telephone connection varies from one country to another Using a fax in your computer You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine Sending a fax To send a fax from your computer the Samsung Network PC Fax program must be installed This program will be installed when you installed the printer driver 1 Open the document to be sent 2 Select Print from the File menu The Print window will be displayed It may look slightly different depending on your application Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window Click Print or OK Faxing_ 1 Adjusting the document settings Forwarding a fax to another destination Setting up address book Printing sent fax report automatically Enter the recipients numbers and select the option If you want to use a cover page check Use cover page Check Notify me on delivery when the fax delivered to the recipients successful
221. ith this machine It could cause damage to the machine Glossy photo l4 Load one paper to the multi purpose tray at a time glossy side facing down e Recommended media Glossy paper Letter for this machine by HP Brochure Paper Product Q6611A only e Recommended media Glossy paper A4 for this machine by HP Superior Paper 160 glossy Product Q6616A Matte photo if Load one paper to the multi purpose tray at a time side to be printed facing down Setting the paper size and type After loading paper in the paper tray set the paper size and type using the control panel These settings will apply to copy and fax modes For computer printing select the paper size and type in the application program you use on your computer See Opening printing preferences on page 2 l4 The settings made from the machine driver override the settings on the control panel Setting the paper size Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Paper Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Paper Size and press OK Press the up down arrow to select the paper tray you want and press OK Press the up down arrow to select the paper size you want Press OK to save the selection Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode aR wWN 3 oe i if If you want to use special sized paper such as a billing paper select Custom in the
222. ithout saving the data in the memory Option Description Redial Times You can specify the number of redial attempts If you enter O the machine will not redial Dial Mode This setting may not be available depending on your country If you cannot reach this option your machine does not support this feature You can set the dial mode for your machine to either tone dialing or pulse dialing If you have a public telephone system or a private branch exchnage PBX system you may need to select Pulse Contact your local telephone company if you are not sure which dial mode to use If you select Pulse some phone system features might not be available It can also take longer to dial a fax or phone number Redial Term Your machine can automatically redial a remote fax machine if it was busy You can set an interval between attempts Receiving Prefix Dial You can set a prefix of up to five digits This number dials before any automatic dial number is started It is useful for accessing a PABX exchange Option Description ECM Mode This mode helps with poor line quality and makes sure any faxes you send are sent smoothly to any other ECM equipped fax machine Sending a fax using ECM may take more time Receive Mode You can select the default fax receiving mode For details on receiving faxes in each mode see Changing the receive modes on page 4 Ring To Answer
223. jobs Scan You can set settings related to scanning jobs E mail Notification You can set e mail notification feature and e mail address of recipients who will receive the notification Network Settings tab This tab allows you to view and change the network environment You can set things such as TCP IP network protocols and so on SNMP You can exchange of management information between network devices using SNMP Outgoing Mail Server SMTP You can set the outgoing E mail server Restore Default You can restore default network settings Security tab This tab allows you to set system and network security information You need to log in as an administrator to view this tab System Security You can set the system administrator s information and also enable or disable machine features Network Security You can set settings for HTTPs IPSec IPv4 IPv6 filtering 802 1x Authentication servers User Access Control You can set configurations for user accessibility Maintenance tab This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmwares and setting contact information for sending emails You can also connect to Samsung website or download drivers by selecting the Link menu Firmware Update You can upgrade your machine s firmware Contact Information You can view the contact information eLink You can view the links to useful sites where you can download orcheck information E mail notification s
224. l PC and press OK IZ If you see Not Available message check the port connection 6 Press the up down arrow until the application program you want is highlighted and press OK Default setting is My Documents fH To add or delete the folder where the scanned file is saved add or delete the application program in Samsung Scan and Fax Manager gt Properties gt Set Scan Button 7 Press the up down arrow until the setting you want is highlighted and press OK Resolution Sets the image resolution Scan Color Sets the color mode Scan Format Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved Scan Size Sets the image size iY Scan Format appears only when you selected the Scan destination to My Documents elf you want to scan from the default setting press Start 8 Scanning begins IZ Scanned image is saved in computer s My Documents gt My Pictures gt Samsung folder eYou can use Twain driver to scan quickly in Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program eYou can also scan by pressing Window s Start gt Control Panel gt Samsung Scan and Fax Manager gt Quick Scan For network connected machine Make sure the scanner printer driver is installed on your computer using the software CD since the printer driver includes the scan program it does not need to be installed separartely in most cases See Installing network connected machine s driver on page 3 1 Make sure that your machine and the
225. lay depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Items Option Fax Feature Darkness Resolution Scan Size Multi Send Delay Send Priority Send Forward Secure Receive Add Page Cancel Job Fax Setup Sending Redial Times Redial Term Prefix Dial ECM Mode Send Report Image TCR Dial Mode Receiving Receive Mode Ring To Answer Stamp RCV Name Rev Start Code Auto Reduction Discard Size Junk Fax Setup DRPD Mode Duplex Print Doc Box Saving Change Default Resolution Darkness Scan Size Auto Report Copy Feature Scan Size Reduce Enlarge Darkness Original Type Layout Adjust Bkgd Margin Shift Edge Erase Gray Enhance WaterMark Machine status and advanced feature 5 Items Option Copy Setup Change Default Scan Size of Copies Collation Reduce Enlarge Darkness Original Type Items Option Scan Feature USB Feature Scan Size Original Type Resolution Scan Color Scan Format Email Feature Scan Size Original Type Resolution Scan Color FTP Feature Scan Size Original Type Resolution Scan Color SMB Feature Scan Size Original Type Resolution Scan Color Scan Setup Change Default USB Feature Scan Size Original Type Resolution Scan Color Scan Format Email Feature Scan Size Original Type Resolution Scan Color Scan Format FTP Feature Scan Size Original Type Resolution Scan Color Scan Format SMB Feature
226. lder CS in the client computer e Check if C drive folder is shared as CS e Check if you can remotely access the client computer s CS folder on a network browser Unable to copy service files Check if you can remotely access the client computer s CS folder on the network browser Unable to start the service on the client computer Check whether RMinstallService program is running from Services From the Windows Start menu select Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services If RMInstalIService is stopped then restart it and try remote installation again If you can t restart RMinstallService then reboot client computer and try remote installation again Unable to create thread for monitoring Restart the client computer Unable to share folder on client computer Unable to copy Installation files Check if the shared folder in the client computer can be shared with full control Unable to execute the setup file normally e Check if the same model s installer is running e Check if the installer is waiting for a user input Message Meaning Suggested solutions N A Check if the environment of client computer is supported OS not for installation supported Internet Explorer not supported MSXML not supported Insufficient free space Not Administrator Create Customized Installer Create Customized Installer
227. lear to return to ready mode Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified server Qe ee SS YS Forwarding a received fax to other destination by server When you forward a fax to FTP or SMB server you must first set the server in SyncThru Web Service See Setting up an FTP server on page 4 or Setting up an SMB server on page 4 You can forward a fax to a total of five destinations via the SMB or FTP Press ps Fax on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Server and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Receive Forward and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been completed select Forward amp Print 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Subsequent received faxes will be forwarded to the specified server ne AS ey a Setting up address book You can set up Address Book with the fax numbers you use most frequently Your machine provides you with the following features for setting up Address Book Before beginning to store fax numbers make sure that your machine Faxing_ 7 is in Fax mode Speed dial numbers You can store up to 240 frequently used fax numbers in speed dial numbers Registering a speed dial numb
228. lected printer 5 Click Paper tab 6 Select tray and its options such as paper size and type 7 Press OK iH If you want to use special sized paper such as a billing paper select Paper tab gt Size gt Edit in the Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 Macintosh Macintosh does not support this function Macintosh users need to change the default setting manually each time they want to print using other settings 1 Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print 2 Open the File menu and click Print 3 Go to Paper Feed pane 4 Set appropriate tray from which you want to print 5 Go to Paper pane 6 Set paper type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print 7 Click Print to print Linux 1 Open Terminal Program 2 When the Terminal screen appears type in the following root localhost root lpr FileName 3 Select Printer and click Properties 4 Click Advanced tab 5 Select tray Source and its options such as paper size and type 6 Press OK Changing the font setting Your machine has preset the font for your region or country If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition such as the 1 Freer Basic setup_ 4 DOS environment you can change the font setting as follows Double click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar or Notification Area in Linux You can also click Smar
229. ll the software without connection of the printer SNMP Coererunity Name eCheck if you want to install the software without connecting the printer to the network or locally Check this option to install this program without a machine connected In this case the print a test page window will be skipped and completes the installation Search again When you press this button the firewall notice window appears Turn off the firewall and Search again For Window operating system click Start gt Control Panel gt Windows Firewall and inactivate this option For other operating systems refer to their guide Turn off the firewall from the third party s program beside the 8 9 4 operating system Refer to the manual provided by individual programs eDirect Input The Direct Input allows you to search for a specific machine on the newtwork Search by IP address Enter the IP address or the host name Then click Next To verify your machine s IP address print a network configuration report See Printing a machine report on page 1 Search by network path To find a shared machine UNC Path enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button Then click Next Help If your machine is not connected to the computer or network This help button gives detailed information about the how to connect the machine The searched machines will be shown on the screen Select th
230. lly try a new machine printer cable The wrong printer driver was selected Check the application s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected The software application is malfunctioning Try printing a job from another application The operating system is malfunctioning Exit Windows and reboot the computer Turn the machine off and back on again If you are ina DOS environment the font setting for your machine may be set incorrectly Change the language setting See Changing the display language on page 1 Printer driver corrupted Reinstall printer drvier Pages print but they are blank The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner Redistribute the toner if necessary If necessary replace the toner cartridge The file may have blank pages Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages Some parts such as the controller or the board may be defective Contact a service representative The machine does not print PDF files correctly Some parts of graphics text or illustrations are missing Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options Z It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image Troubleshooting 15
231. lt machine does not support Direct Printing Utility the message window alerting you to select the appropriate machine opens Select the appropriate machine in the Select Printer section 2 Customize the machine settings for your needs 3 Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the machine Using the right click menu 1 Right click on the PDF file you wish to print and select Direct Printing Utility The Direct Printing Utility window opens with the PDF file is added 2 Select the machine you wish to use Customize the machine settings for your needs 4 Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the machine 9 Changing the default print settings 1 Click the Windows Start menu 2 For Windows 2000 select Settings gt Printers For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes For Windows 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers 3 Right click your machine 4 For Windows XP 2003 2008 Vista press Printing Preferences For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 from context menus select the Printing preferences l4 If Printing preferences item has mark you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer 5 Change the settings on each tab 6 Click OK LY If you want to change th
232. ltitude setting to optimize your printing See Altitude adjustment on page 1 Place the machine on a flat stable surface so that there is no incline greater than 2 cm 0 79 inch Otherwise printing quality may be affected 0 79 inch 2 cm i 2 cm 0 79 inch e System requirements e Installing USB connected machine s driver e Sharing your machine locally Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items Remove all the tapes Install the toner cartridges Load paper See Loading paper in the tray on page 3 Make sure that all cables are connected to the machine 7 Turn the machine on A This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails DAAN Printing a demo page Print a demo page to make sure that the machine is operating correctly To print a demo page In ready mode press and hold the OK for about 3 seconds then release Supplied software After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer you must install the printer software If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS install the software from the supplied CD and if you are a Linux OS user or UNIX OS user download the software from the Samsung website www samsung com printer and install K Machine software are occasionally updated due to release of new operating system and etc If needed download the latest version from the Samsung website www samsung com p
233. ly 6 Click Send For more information about Samsung Network PC Fax click Help Checking a sent fax list You can check a sent fax list on your computer From the Start menu click Programs or All Programs 5 Samsung Printers gt Network PC Fax gt Fax Journal Then the Fax Journal appears with the fax list you have sent Receiving a fax If you have installed the printer driver the Samsung Scan amp Fax Manager program is also installed Start Samsung Scan amp Fax Manager program to find out about this program information and the installed driver s condition Through this program you can change fax settings and add or delete the folders where faxed documents are saved in your computer YH The Samsung Scan amp Fax Manager program can only be used with the Windows and Macintosh systems Check if the forwarding a fax to PC is set to On a Press ps Fax on the control panel b Press Menu on the control panel c Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax Feature appears and press OK d Press the up down arrow to highlight Forward appears and press OK e Press the the up down arrow to highlight PC appears and press OK 1 Open the Samsung Scan amp Fax Manager For Windows from the Start menu click All programs gt Samsung Printers gt Samsung Scan amp Fax Manager gt Samsung Scan amp Fax Manager Or you can open this program by right clicking the Smart Panel icon in the Windows task bar and selecting the Sams
234. mail in SmarThru Office Procedure for sending email may differ depending on email client program you are using 1 Double click the SmarThru Office icon on your desktop 2 Select the file to send to Email 3 Select File gt Send to gt Send By E mail 4 An email client opens 5 Type in necessary information and send your email Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring machine devices You need to install Unified Linux Driver to use Unified Driver Configurator See Installing the Linux Unified Driver on page 5 After the driver is installed on your Linux system the Unified Driver Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop Opening the Unified Driver Configurator 1 Double click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified Driver gt Unified Driver Configurator 2 Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding configuration window Untied Driver Configurator Printers coniguraten Printons Cimssrs 1 Printers Configuration ected printer Local arin 2 Scanners eae Configuration 3 Ports Configuration iY To use the on screen help click Help 3 After changing the configurations click Exit to close the Unified Driver Configurator Management tools 4 Printers configuration Classes tab Printers conf
235. mance and the output quality When you choose print materials consider the following e The type size and weight of the print media for your machine are described in print media specifications See Print media specifications on page 3 e Desired outcome The print media you choose should be appropriate for your project e Brightness Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper more vibrant images e Surface smoothness The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp the printing looks on the paper fH Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and still not produce satisfactory results This may be the result of improper handling unacceptable temperature and humidity levels or other variables over which cannot be controlled eBefore purchasing large quantities of print media ensure that it meets the requirements specifications in this user s guide and meets your output requirements A Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems requiring repairs Such repairs are not covered by the warranty or service agreements The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media type used See Print media specifications on page 3 Media sizes supported in each mode Mode Size Source Copy mode Letter A4 Legal e Tray 1 ee ecg I Optional tray 2 xecutive 7 B5 A5 AG Multi purpose tray Print mode All sizes supported by Tray1
236. mark drop down list The Edit Watermarks window appears 3 Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete 4 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Using overlay PCL driver only An overlay is text and or images stored in the computer hard disk drive HDD as a special file format that can be printed on any document Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper Rather than using preprinted letterhead you can create an overlay containing exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead To print a letter with your company s letterhead you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the machine just print the letterhead overlay on your document A Creating a new page overlay To use a page overlay you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image 1 Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a new page overlay Position the items exactly as you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay 2 To save the document as an overlay access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 3 Click the Advanced tab and select Edit from the Text drop down list Edit Overlay window appears 4 n the Edit Overlay window click Create 5 In the Save As window type a name of up to eight characters in the File name box Select the destination path if necessary The default is C Formove
237. mode 1 Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 through 4 in Activating secure receiving mode 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight Off and press OK 3 Enter the four digit password and press OK The mode is deactivated and the machine prints all faxes stored in memory 4 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Printing received faxes on both sides of the paper Set this duplex feature to save paper When the machine prints the received fax data it prints them on both sides of the paper 1 Press ps Fax on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Receiving and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Duplex Print and press OK Press the up down arrow until the binding option you want highlights DD Aa o NO Faxing 5 eOff Prints in Normal mode eLong Edge Prints pages to be read like a book r JIN a a Q gt Short Edge Prints pages to be read by flipping like a note pad 7 Press OK to save your selection 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Receiving faxes in memory Since your machine is a multi tasking device it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory Then as soon as you finish copying or printing the machine automa
238. mote Installation and type in the administrator s Domain ID and Password l4 If your company has no domain network environment you can use Workgroup Remote Installation See Workgroup Remote Installation on page 2 8 Click Next 9 Select Clients window appears 10 Type in the group name in the Group Name field 11 Add the client computers to be in the group to the right side panel l4 eYou can click button to search the client computers and add button to add a client computer by typing the IP address or the computer name of client eYou can add up to 50 client computers in a group If you want to add more than 50 client computers you need to create more groups elf the firewall is enabled on the client computer access may be denied The client computer s operating system should be Windows 2000 or higher eC drive must be shared as C 12 Select Software and Utilities to Install window appears Select the driver s and application software s you want to install and click Next 13 Select Printer connection window appears Select the printer connection type and click Next elf you selected Network Connection Search Network Printers window appears type in the IP address or host name in the information field than click Search when you are finished click Next The discovered printer list will show network printers on the same subnet If you want to specify a network printer that is located over subnet then spec
239. moved pages back into the document feeder Tips for avoiding paper jams By selecting the correct media types most paper jams can be avoided When a paper jam occurs refer to the next guidelines e Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly See Loading paper in the tray on page 3 Do not overload the tray Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray e Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing e Flex fan and straighten paper before loading e Do not use creased damp or highly curled paper e Do not mix paper types in a tray e Use only recommended print media See Setting the paper size and type on page 7 e Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in the tray or facing down in the multi purpose tray Clearing paper jams When a paper jam occurs a warning message appears on the display screen To avoid tearing the paper pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the jam In tray 1 Z Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Open and close the front door The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine If the paper does not exit go to the next step 2 Pull out tray 1 3 Remove the jammed paper by pulling in the direction shown To avoid tearing the paper pull it out gently and slowl
240. n adjust the position of color texts or graphics to match the position of the printed colors to those on your screen iY If you have moved the machine it is strongly recommended to operate this menu manually Density Control The machine automatically calibrates the toner density of machine for the best possible color print quality If you select Off the machine is calibrated by the factory default toner density Density Adjustment This item allows you to quickly adjust color density You can easily adjust the color density and see the result right away but it s not a permenant adjustment Use this item to get a quick result Density Sensing Automatically calculates the reduced or worn out supplies like toner or machine parts and uses this information to adjust the color density For example if the yellow toner is running out the machine calculates the amount of remaining yellow toner and adjusts color density so the printouts are fine Density Calibration You can manually calibrate the toner density of machine for the best possible color print quality a CLX 6250 Series only Finding the serial number When you call for service or register as a user on the Samsung website the machine s serial number by taking the following steps Maintenance_ 1 Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Maintenanc
241. n arrow until the binding option you want is highlighted Off Does not use this feature eLeft Page Use this option to print left page of the book Right Page Use this option to print right page of the book Both Page Use this option to print both pages of the book 8 Press OK 9 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode 10 Press Start to begin copying Adjusting background images You can set the printer to print an image without its background This copy feature removes the background color and can be helpful when copying an original containing color in the background such as a newspaper or a catalog 1 Press SG Copy on the control panel 2 Place originals face up in the document feeder Or you can use the scanner glass with a single original document face down and closed the scanner lid 3 Press Menu on the control panel 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow to highlight Adjust Bkgd and press OK 6 Press the up down arrow until the binding option you want is highlighted Off Does not use this feature eAuto Optimizes the background eEnhance Lev 1 2 The higher the number is the more vivid the background is Erase Lev 1 4 The higher the number is the lighter the background is 7 Press OK 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode 9 Press Start to begin copying Margin shift copying The Margin Shift feature allows you to create a bindin
242. n driver appears Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your preferences affect the picture Click Scan If you want to cancel the scan job press the Cancel button on the Scanner and Camera Wizard Windows 7 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 1 3 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers 4 Click right button of mouse on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes gt Start Scan New Scan application appears 5 Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your preferences affect the picture 6 Click Scan Macintosh scanning You can scan documents using Image Capture program Macintosh OS offers Image Capture program Scanning with USB 1 2 4 5 K Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 1 Start Applications and click Image Capture iH If No Image Capture device connected message appears disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it If the problem continues refer to the Image Capture s help Set the scan options on this program Scan and save your scanned image
243. n in the Authentication Method section Click Apply Click OK in the modifying confirmation pop up window Click User Profile Click Add 0 Enter User Name Login ID Password E mail Address and Fax Number You need to enter the registered user ID and password in the machine when you start scanning to email from the control panel 11 Click Apply So eae ae NG Scanning 4 Using Samsung Scan and Fax Manager If you have installed the printer driver the Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program is installed too Start Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program to find out about this program information and the installed scan driver s condition Through this program you can change scan settings and add or delete the folders where scanned documents are saved in your computer K The Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program can only be used in the Window and Macintosh system If you use the Macintosh See Setting scan information in Scan Manager on page 7 1 From the Start menu click Control Panel gt Samsung Scan and Fax Manager l4 You can open Samsung Scan and Fax Manager by right clicking the Smart Panel icon in the Windows task bar and selecting Scan Manager 2 Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan and Fax Manager window 3 Press Properties 4 The Set Scan Button tab allows you to change the saving destination and scan settings add or delete application program and format files You can change the scanni
244. n page 2 Solid Color or Black pages e The toner cartridge may not be installed properly Remove the cartridge and reinsert it e The toner cartridge may be defective Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 e The machine may require repair Contact a service representative Troubleshooting_ 17 Condition Suggested Solutions Copying problems Loose toner e Clean the inside of the machine See Cleaning the inside on page 2 e Check the paper type and quality See Print media specifications on page 3 e Remove the toner cartridge and then install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 e If the problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative Condition Suggested solution Copies are too light or too dark Use Darkness in Copy feature to lighten or darken the backgrounds of copies See Changing the darkness on page 1 Character Voids Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black e You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper Remove the paper and turn it around e The paper may not meet paper specifications See Print media specifications on page 3 Smears lines marks or spots appear on copies e Ifthe defects are on the original use Darkness in Copy feature to lighten the backg
245. name Then click Next To verify your machine s IP address print a network configuration report See Printing a machine report on page 1 Search by network path To find a shared machine UNC Path enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button Then click Next Help If your machine is not connected to the computer or network This help button gives detailed information about the how to connect the machine The searched machines will be shown on the screen Select the one you wish to use and click Next iY If the driver searched only one machine the confirmation window appears After the installation is finished a window asking you to print a test page appears If you want to print a test page click Print a test page Otherwise just click Next and skip to step 8 If the test page prints out correctly click Yes If not click No to reprint it To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information from Samsung click On line Registration Network setup_ 4 9 Click Finish K eAfter the driver setup you may enable firewall elf the printer driver does not work properly follow the steps below to repair or reinstall the driver a Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and powered on b From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt your printer driver name gt Maintenance c Select the option as you wish foll
246. name that identifies a wireless network SSID is case sensitive so you need to enter it carefully Press OK 2 Select the type of wireless connections Press the up down arrow to select the method of Operation Mode you want and press OK eAd hoc Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with each other in a peer to peer environment Go to step 3 Infrastructure Allows wireless devices to communicate with each other through an access point Go to step 4 3 Press the up down arrow to select the method of Channel you want and press OK If you select Auto the wireless network interface card on your machine will automatically adjust the channels 4 Press the up down arrow to select the method of WLAN Security you want and press OK eNone This is used when the validation of a wireless device s identity and data encryption are not required for your network Open system is used for IEEE 802 11 authentication eStatic WEP This uses the WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy algorithm suggested by IEEE 802 11 standard for security Static WEP security mode requires a proper WEP key for data encryption decryption and IEEE 802 11 authentication Press the left right arrow to select the setup method you want in Authentication and press OK Supplies and accessories_ 7 Open System Authentication is not used and encryption may or may not be used depending on the need for data security Enter the WEP Key using number keypad after selecting
247. nd a larger file size DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers Duplex A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print or scan on both sides of the paper A printer equipped with a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle Duty Cycle Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year The lifespan means the average capacity of print outs usually within the warranty period For example if the duty cycle is 48 000 pages per month assuming 20 working days a printer limits 2 400 pages a day ECM Error Correction Mode ECM is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise Emulation Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system so that the second system behaves like the first system Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior which is in contrast to simulation which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated
248. nd a telephone line It is very popular as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network Grayscale A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale colors are represented by various shades of gray Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots HDD Hard Disk Drive HDD commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk is a non volatile storage device which stores digitally encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE is an international non profit professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity IEEE 1284 The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE The term 1284 B refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral for example a printer Intranet A private network that uses Internet Protocols network connectivity and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization s information or operations with its employees Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service the internal website IP add
249. never using your machine Also follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the accompanying literature After reading this section keep it in a safe place for future reference Important safety symbols This section explains the meanings of all icons and signs in the user s guide These safety symbols are in order according to the degree of danger Explanation of all icons and signs used in the user s guide Warning Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death Caution Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage Do not attempt Do not disassemble Do not touch Unplug the power cord from the wall socket Make sure the machine is grounded to prevent electric shock Call the service center for help eCGeQ GK Of Follow directions explicitly Operating environment A Warning etc Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is not grounded gt This could result in electric shock or fire Do not place anything on top of the machine water small metal or heavy objects candles lit cigarettes gt This could result in electric shock or fire Do not bend or place heavy objects on the power COrd gt Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy object could result in electric shock or fire Do not rem
250. nformation Clearing memory You can selectively clear information stored in your machine s memory 1 Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Clear Setting and press OK Press the up down arrow until the item you want to clear highlights and press OK Press OK when Yes highlights to confirm clearing Repeat steps 4 through 5 to clear another item Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode AA ARO NG ga Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Option Description All Settings Clears all of the data stored in memory and resets all of your settings to the factory default Fax Setup Restores all of the fax options to the factory default Copy Setup Restores all of the copy options to the factory default Option Description Scan Setup Restores all of the scan options to the factory default System Setup Restores all of the system options to the factory default Network Setup Restores all of the network options to the factory default Address Book Clears all of the email address entries stored in memory Sent Report Clears all records of sent faxes and emails Fax Rev Report Clears all records of received faxes Network You may set up the network with the machine s display screen
251. ng AnyWeb Print gt Download the lastest version to link the website where the tool is available for the download This tool is available only for Windows operating systems Samsung Easy Color Manager This program helps users to adjust color as they like Users can adjust the printout color as they see them on the monitor The adjusted color can be stored on the printer driver and applied to printouts Download this program from http solution samsungprinter com personal colormanager Printer driver features e Changing the default print settings e Setting your machine as a default machine e Printing to a file PRN e Using the job accounting option e Macintosh printing e Linux printing e UNIX printing PCL Printer driver Feature Windows Machine quality option Booklet printing Poster printing Multiple pages per sheet Fit to page printing Reduce and enlarge printing Different source for first page Watermark Overlay Double sided printing duplex e Supported Blank Not supported PostScript Printer driver Your printer drivers support the following standard features e Paper orientation size source and media type selection e Number of copies In addition you can use various special printing features The following table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer drivers Some models or operating system may not suppo
252. ng in application Multi purpose tray The multi purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material such as postcards note cards and envelopes It is useful for single page printing on colored paper Tips on using the multi purpose tray eLoad only one type size and weight of print media at a time in the multi purpose tray eTo prevent paper jams do not add paper while printing when there is still paper in the multi purpose tray This also applies to other types of print media Always load the specified print media only to avoid paper jams and print quality problems See Print media specifications on page 3 Flatten any curl on postcards envelopes and labels before loading them into the multi purpose tray 1 Grab the handle of multi purpose tray and pull it down to open 2 Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading papers 4 Squeeze the multi purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them to the width of the paper Do not force too much or the paper will bent resulting in a paper jam or skew IZ eWhen printing the special media you must follow the loading guideline See Printing on special media on page 5 When paper does not feed well while printing push the paper in manually until it starts feeding automatically Media and tray 4 5 When you print a document set the paper type and size for the multi purpose tray For information abo
253. ng machine by using the Change Port tab Local or Network 5 When setting is done press OK Set Scan Button tab Scan Destination eAvailable Destination List Shows the list of applications currently linked to scanned images in the PC s registry Select the program you want to use and click the right arrow and add to Front Panel Destination List Front Panel Destination List Shows the list of applications to open scanned images Add Application Allows you to add an application you want to use to the Available Destination List Remove Application Allows you to remove an item added by the user from the Available Destination List File Format Allows you to select the format of scanned data to be saved You can choose among BMP JPEG PDF and TIFF Scan Property Computer ID Shows the ID of your computer Save Location Allows you to choose the location of the default saving folder Resolution Allows you to choose the scan resolution Scan Color Allows you to choose the scan color Scan Size Allows you to choose the scan size ADF Duplex Automatically scans both sides If your model does not support this option it will be grayed out Show Preview Checking this box allows you to preview applied scan options You can modify the options before scanning eDefault Allows you to go back to default options Change Port tab e Local Scanner Select when your machine is connected via USB or LPT port
254. ng paper jams Redistributing toner When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life e White streaks or light printing occurs e The toner related message saying that the toner is low may appear on the display e The Status LED blinks red If this happens you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge In some cases white streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner 1 Using the handle completely open the front door Clearing paper jams Understanding display messages Solving other problems A If you open the front door be careful not to touch the underneath the control panel the lower part of the fuser unit The temperature of the fuser unit might be extremely hot and could damage your skin When you open the front door and work inside the machine it is highly recommend that you remove the paper transfer belt first Because the work you do could contaminate the paper transfer belt Holding both handles on the toner cartridge thoroughly rock it from side to side to redistribute the toner iY If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into the opening in the machine Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding gro
255. noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus ICES 003 of the Industry and Science Canada Cet appareil num rique respecte les limites de bruits radio lectriques applicables aux appareils numeriques de Classe A prescrites dans la norme sur le mat riel brouilleur Appareils Num riques ICES 003 dict e par I Industrie et Sciences Canada Regulatory information_ 3 UNITED STATES OF AMERICA Taiwan only Federal Communications Commission FCC Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15 Low power Radio LAN type devices radio frequency RF wireless communication devices operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz Band may be present embedded in your printer system This section is only applicable if these devices are present Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm 8 inches separation between the device and the body for use of a wireless device near the body this does not include extremities This device should be used more than 20 cm 8 inches from the body when wireless devices are on The power output of the wireless device or devices which may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the FCC This
256. not disappeared from the spooler in Mac OS X 10 3 2 Update your Mac OS to OS Mac OS X 10 3 3 or higher Some letters are not displayed normally during the cover page printing Mac OS cannot create the font during the cover page printing The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on the cover page When printing a document in Macintosh with Acrobat Reader 6 0 or higher colors print incorrectly Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader The machine does not scan Ensure a document is loaded into the machine ensure your machine is connected to the computer If there is an I O error while scanning Z Refer to Linux User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages i Refer to Macintosh User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Macintosh error messages Troubleshooting 22 supplies and accessories This chapter provides information on purchasing supplies accessories and maintenance parts available for your machine This chapter includes e How to purchase e Available supplies e Available accessories e Maintenance parts e Replacing the toner cartridge e Replacing the paper transfer belt Z Available accessories may differ from country to country Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available accessories How
257. ns Samsung Printer Paper Size Paper Type Printer Default Paper Source Printer Auto Selection F Orientation Duplex A Portrait A None w Landscape w Long Edge x Reverse Portrait w Short Edge w Reverse Landscape Multiple Pages Pages per Sheet fi A Page Layout Len to right top to bottom Page Border Border Style None 4 Hlelp Alpply C ancel 01k Printing 12 General tab ePaper Size Set the paper size as A4 Letter or other paper sizes according to your requirements ePaper Type Choose the type of the paper Options available in the list box are Printer Default Plain and Thick ePaper Source Select the source of the page By default it is Auto Selection Orientation Select the direction in which information is printed on a page eDuplex Print on both sides of paper to save paper Multiple pages Print several pages on one side of paper Page Border Choose any of the border styles e g Single line hairline Double line hairline Image tab In this tab you can change the brightness resolution or an image position of your document Text tab Set the character margin line space or the columns of the actual print output HPGL 2 tab Use only black pen To print all graphics in black Fit plot to page Fit the entire graphic into a single page Pen Width Change value to increase the thickness of pen lines By default it is 100
258. nstallation Administrator Installation Installation Language English If necessary select a language from the drop down list l4 eFor CLX 6250 Series installation window you can see Wireless Setting and Installation menu You can use this menu if an optional wireless network card is installed and or the machine is connected to your computer with a USB cable Install the optional wireless network card Instructions for Wireless Setting and Installation refer to the wireless network installation guide provided with the optional wireless network card eThe Advanced Installation has two options Custom Getting started_ 3 Installation and Install Software Only The Custom Installation allows you to select the machine s connection and choose individual components to install The Install Software Only allows you to install the supplied software such as Smart Panel Follow the instruction in the window eAdministrator Installation provides convenient installation methods useful for administrators See Administrator s Guide Windows only on page 1 Read License Agreement and select accept the terms of the License Agreement Then click Next License Agreement Please read the License Agreement License Language English END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS SOFTWARE PRODUCT IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This Samsung Electronics End User License Agreement EULA is a legal agreement bet
259. nt fax to other destination by a fax an email or a server If you are out of office but have to receive the fax this feature may be useful When you forward a fax by an email you must first set the mail server and IP address in SyncThru Web Service See Using SyncThru Web Service on page 1 Forwarding a sent fax to another destination You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to another destination Faxing 6 Press ps Fax on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Send Forward and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight On and press OK Enter the number of the fax machine to which faxes are to be sent and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine a LL BO a 19 Forwarding a received fax to another destination With this feature you can forward every fax you received to another destination by faxing When the machine receives a fax a fax is stored in the memory then the machine sends it to the destination you have set 1 Press ps Fax on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highligh
260. nt memory slot See Available accessories on page 2 We recommend the use of only genuine Samsung DIMM s You may void your warranty if it is determined that your machine problem is being caused by third party DIMM s Supplies and accessories_ 4 Installing a memory module 1 Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine 2 Remove the screws and remove the rear cover 3 Remove the screws then lift up the cover slightly and pull the cover to the right 1 Control board cover 4 Remove the new memory module from its bag 5 Holding the memory module by the edges align the memory module in the slot at about a 30 degree angle Make sure that the notches of the module and the grooves on the slot fit each other iH The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match those on an actual memory module and its slot 6 Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a click Do not press the memory module strongly or the module may be damaged If the module does not seem to fit into the slot properly carefully try the previous procedure again Install the control board with the screw removed in step 3 Install the rear cover with the screw removed in step 2 Reconnect the power cord and printer cable and turn the machine on O 4 If you use the PS driver you must activate the added memory in the PS driver properties See Activating the ad
261. ntaminate the paper transfer belt 3 Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag AN eDon t use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the print cartridge package You could damage the surface of the print cartridge eTo prevent damage do not expose the print cartridge to light for more than a few minutes Cover it with a piece of paper to protect it if necessary 4 Slowly shake the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge It will assure maximum copies per cartridge 5 Place the print cartridge on a flat surface as shown and remove the paper covering the print cartridge by removing the tape A elf toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric eDo not touch the surface the OPC drum in the cartridge If the surface is contaminated it might affect the printout quality Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area 6 Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into the opening in the machine Ensure the color cartridge is placed in the correct position see label in picture below for the correct color position for each cartridge Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the machine will guide the cartridge into the correct position until it locks into place completely 7 Close the front door Make sure that the cover
262. nter in this window referring the procedure next K On some UNIX OS for example on Solaris 10 just added printer may not be enabled and or may not accept jobs In this case run the following two commands on the root terminal accept lt printer_name gt enable lt printer_name gt Uninstalling the printer driver package 4 The uninstalling printer utility should be used to delete the printer installed in the system a Run uninstallprinter command from the terminal It will open the Uninstall Printer Wizard The installed printers are listed in the drop down list b Select the printer to be deleted c Click Delete to delete the printer from the system d Execute the install d command to uninstall the whole package e To verify uninstall results execute the install c command To reinstall it again use the command install to reinstall the binaries Setting up the printer To add the printer to your UNIX system run installprinter from the command line This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window Setup the printer in this window according to the following steps 1 Type the name of the printer 2 Select appropriate printer model from model list 3 Enter any decsription corresponding to the type of the printer in the Type field This is optional 4 Specify any printer description in the Description field This is optional 5 Specify printer location in the Location field 6 Type t
263. ntil GNU Ghostscript version 7 05 when the base color space of the document is indexed color space and it is converted through CIE color space Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 7 06 or later You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www ghostscript com Some color images come out in unexpected color This is a known bug in Ghostscript until GNU Ghostscript version 7 xx when the base color space of the document is indexed RGB color space and it is converted through CIE color space Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 8 xx or later You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www ghostscript com The machine does not print whole pages and its output is half page printed It is a known problem that occurs when a color printer is used on version 8 51 or earlier of Ghostscript 64 bit Linux OS and reported to bugs ghostscript com as Ghostscript Bug 688252 The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v 8 52 or above Download the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http sourceforge net projects gho cannot scan via Gimp Front end Check if Gimp Front end has Xsane Device dialog on the Acquire menu If not you should install Xsane plug in for Gimp on the your computer You can find
264. ntrol panel see the next column Configuring the machine s wireless network Before starting you will need to know the network name SSID of your wireless network and the network key if it is encrypted This information was set when the wireless router access point was installed If you do not know about your wireless environment please ask the person who has set up your network To configure wireless parameters you can use both control panel and SyncThru Web Service Using the control panel 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight Network and press OK 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Wireless and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight WLAN Settings and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow to select the setup method you want is highlighted and press OK eWizard The wireless network interface card in your printer searches for wireless networks in the area and shows the results Custom You can configure the wireless settings according to your needs Wizard mode 1 The wireless network interface card on your machine searches for wireless network in the area and shows the results 2 Press the up down arrow to select a network you want to use in Search List and press OK You can select a network using SSID 3 When None appears in WLAN Security on the display press OK to save your selection go to step 6 If you see another messages go to the next step 4 Accordin
265. nts Contains UFST and MicroType from Monotype Imaging Inc Print in various environments e You can print with various operating system such as Windows Linux Macintosh and UNIX systems See System requirements on page 2 e Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and a network interface Copy originals in several formats e Your machine can copy multiple image copies from the original document on a single page See 2 up or 4 up copying N up on page 3 e The print quality and image size may be adjusted and enhance at the same time Scan the originals and send it right away e Scan in color and use the precise compressions of JPEG TIFF and PDF formats Quickly scan and send files to multiple destinations using Networks scanning See Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment on page 2 Set a specific time to transmit a Fax e You can specify a certain time to transmit the fax and also send the fax to several stored destinations e After the transmission the machine may print out the fax reports according to the setting Use USB flash memory devices If you have a USB memory device you can use it in various ways with your machine e You can scan documents and save them to the device e You can directly print data stored to the device Features of your new product 1 IPv6 This machine supports IPv6 Features by Models The machine is des
266. nvelope Labels 120 to 150 g m 32 to 40 Ib label CardStock 171 to 220 g m 46 to 59 Ib cardstock Bond 105 to 120 g m 28 to 32 Ib bond Archive 70 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ib If you need to keep the print out for a long period time such as archives select this option Glossy Photo 111 to 130 g m 30 to 35Ib 131 to 175 g m 35 to 471b 176 to 220 g m 47 to 59Ib glossy photo paper Matte Photo 111 to 130 g m 30 to 351b 131 to 175 g m 35 to 471b 176 to 220 g m 47 to 59Ib matte photo paper Envelope Print media specifications on page 3 Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes To print an envelope place it flap side up with the stamp area bottm the top right side Types Tray 1 Optional tray ki a Plain 6 o 6 Thick 8 8 Thicker o Extra Thick 6 Thin 8 o Cotton Color 8 Preprinted 6 Recycled Envelope Labels 8 CardStock Bond 6 Archive Glossy Photo Matte Photo o e Supported Blank Not supported The media types are shown in the Printing Preferences This paper type option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray This setting appears in the list so that you can select it This will let you get the best quality printout If not the desired print quality may not be achieved e Plain 70 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ib Normal plain paper
267. o print reports such as an error report and so on Active Alerts This item allows you to check the alerts occurred in the machine and their severity Supplies This item allows you to check how many pages are printed and amount of toner left in the cartridge Usage Counters This item allows you to check the usage count by print types simplex duplex Current Settings This item allows you to check the machine and network information ePrint information This item allows you to print reports such as system related reports e mail address and font reports Box tab This tab only appears when an optional hard disk drive HDD is installed You can save PC printed faxed scanned or copied documents in the User Box or System Box and print the saved documents iY When saving the document using the Add from Scan menu in the control panel you can choose the box to save the scanned document from the below Common Box This box is provided by default Received faxes are stored in this box Allows you to store received faxes if Doc Box Saving menu in the control panel is On You cannot delete this box ePublic Box This box can be created by a user Secure Box This box is created by a user You can set the password for accessing this box User Box Only received fax and scanned documents will be saved in this box Types of boxes provided may differ depending on the model you are using System Box You can save the documents f
268. o highlight Copy Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Original Type and press OK Press the up down arrow until the image mode you want is highlighted and press OK eText Use for originals containing mostly text eText Photo Use for originals with mixed text and photographs ePhoto Use when the originals are photographs Magazine Use when the originals are magazines 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode moa a NO Selecting the scan size of originals You can choose the size to be scanned K The scan size options may vary between document feeder or scanner glass Press KG COPY on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Scan Size and press OK Press the up down arrow until the scan size you want is highlighted and press OK Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode oe oY gt D Copying_ 1 Reducing or enlarging copies You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25 to 400 when you copy original documents from the scanner glass or from 25 to 100 from the document feeder To select from the predefined copy sizes 1 Press SG Copy on the control panel 2 Press Menu on the control panel 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Copy Feature and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Reduce Enlarge and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow until the
269. ocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client BOOTP enables diskless workstation computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system Glossary_ 1 CCD Charge Coupled Device CCD is a hardware which enables the scan job CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine Collation Collation is a process of printing a multiple copy job in sets When collation is selected the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies Control Panel A control panel is a flat typically vertical area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed They are typically found in front of the machine Coverage It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing For example 5 coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5 image or text on it So if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it the coverage will be higher and at the same time a toner usage will be as much as the coverage CSV Comma Separated Values CSV A type of file format CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications The file format as it is used in Microsoft Excel has become a de facto standard through
270. ocument in the hard disk without printing Spool This option can be useful to handle large amount of data If you select this setting the print spools the document into the hard disk and then prints it from the hard disk queue decreasing the computer s work load Print Schedule Select this setting to print the document at a specified time e User ID This option is used when you need to find a saved file using the control panel e Job Name This option is used when you need to find a saved file using the control panel Graphics tab options Use the following Graphics options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs Printing_ 6 Adjusting color If you feel the color difference between the printout and monitor you may change the color setting such as color contrast or color level The printer driver provides graphic options to adjust the print quality for specific printing needs Z elf the option is grayed out or not shown that option is not applicable with the printer language you are using eThis options you can select may vary depending on your printer model 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 Click the Graphics tab Refer to the online help for each option s information provided from the Printing Preferences Color Mode You can choose color options between Color or Grayscale Set
271. often considering its internal state Ethernet Ethernet is a frame based computer networking technology for local area networks LANs It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer and frame formats and protocols for the media access control MAC data link layer of the OSI model Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802 3 It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present Glossary_ 2 EtherTalk A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking It was included in the original Macintosh 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking FDI Foreign Device Interface FDI is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader Those devices allow the pay for print service on your machine FTP A File Transfer Protocol FTP is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP IP protocol such as the Internet or an intranet Fuser Unit The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media It consists of a heat roller and a pressure roller After toner is transferred onto the paper the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer Gateway A connection between computer networks or between a computer network a
272. on This option allows you to select the output format for PostScript files Optimize for Speed General format for PostScript files Optimize for Portability Creates a file that conforms to the Adobe Document Structuring Conventions ADSC This is a useful format to use when you want to create a PostScript file and print it on a different machine Encapsulated PostScript EPS Creates a file as a image This is a useful format to use if you want include the file as an image in another document that will be printed from a different program Archive Format Creates a PostScript file you can use it later e PostScript Language This option allows you to choose the PostScript language level e Send PostScript Error Handler If this options is checked the machine prints an error page when an error occurs during printing nging direct printing utility CLX 6250 Series only This chapter explains how to use the Direct Printing Utility to print PDF files without having to open the files A eHard disk drive HDD should be installed on your machine to print PDF files using this program eYou cannot print PDF files that are restricted to print Deactivate the printing restriction feature and retry printing eYou cannot print PDF files that are protected by a password Deactivate the password feature and retry printing eWhether or not a PDF file can be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program depends on how the PDF file
273. on telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT socket Receiving in secure receiving mode You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended In secure receiving mode all incoming faxes go into memory When the mode is deactivated any stored faxes are printed Activating secure receiving mode Press ps Fax on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Secure Receive and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight On and press OK Enter a four digit password you want to use and press OK DAAN gt iY You can activate secure receiving mode without setting a password but cannot protect your faxes 7 Re enter the password to confirm it and press OK 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode When a fax is received in secure receiving mode your machine stores it in memory and shows Secure Receive to let you know that there is a fax received Printing received faxes 1 Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 through 4 in Activating secure receiving mode 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight Print and press OK 3 Enter the four digit password and press OK The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory Deactivating secure receiving
274. ondition Possible cause Suggested solutions The machine selects print materials from the wrong paper source The paper option that was selected in the Printing Preferences may be incorrect For many software applications the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab within the Printing Preferences Select the correct paper source See the printer driver help screen See Opening printing preferences on page 2 A print job is extremely slow The job may be very complex Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings Half the page is blank The page orientation setting may be incorrect Change the page orientation in your application See the printer driver help screen The paper size and the paper size settings do not match Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray Or ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use The machine prints but the text is wrong garbled or incomplete The machine cable is loose or defective Disconnect the machine printer cable and reconnect Try a print job that you have already printed successfully If possible attach the printer cable and the machine to another computer that you know works ensure print driver is installed and try a print job Fina
275. oner cartridge Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic store brand refilled or remanufactured toner cartridges A Samsung s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused by the use of a refilled remanufactured or non Samsung brand toner cartridge Estimated cartridge life Estimated cartridge life the life of the toner cartridge yield depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require The actual print out number may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on operating environment printing interval media type and or media size For example if you print a lot of graphics the consumption of the toner is high and you may need to change the cartridge more often Tips for moving amp storing your machine e When moving the machine do not tilt or turn it upside down Otherwise the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner which can cause damage to the machine or bad print quality e When moving the machine make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely e When moving the machine or when machine is not in use for a long time lock the scanner lock Maintenance_ 4 troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error This chapter includes e Redistributing toner e Clearing original document jams e Tips for avoidi
276. onsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources lt Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product or their local government office for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal Correct disposal of batteries in this product Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems This marking on the battery manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life Where marked the chemical symbols Hg Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006 66 If batteries are not properly disposed of these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local free battery return system Radio Frequency Emissions FCC Information to the User This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cau
277. ontact the Samsung customer care center Country Regio n Customer Care Center Web Site Country Regio n Customer Care Center Web Site ARGENTINE 0800 333 3733 www samsung com ar AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www samsung com au AUSTRIA 0810 SAMSUNG 7267864 www samsung com at 0 07 min BELARUS 810 800 500 55 500 www samsung ua www samsung com ua_r u BELGIUM 02 201 2418 www samsung com be Dutch www samsung com be_fr French BRAZIL 0800 124 421 www samsung com br 4004 0000 CANADA 1 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com ca 726 7864 CHILE 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com cl CHINA 400 810 5858 www samsung com cn 010 6475 1880 COLOMBIA 01 8000112112 www samsung com co COSTA RICA 0 800 507 7267 www samsung com latin CZECH 800 SAMSUNG www samsung com cz REPUBLIC 800 726786 Samsung Zrt Ceska organizacni slozka Oasis Florenc Sokolovska394 17 180 00 Praha 8 DENMARK 8 SAMSUNG 7267864 www samsung com dk ECUADOR 1 800 10 7267 www samsung com latin EL SALVADOR 800 6225 www samsung com latin ESTONIA 800 7267 www samsung com ee KAZAKHSTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com kz ru KYRGYZSTAN 00 800 500 55 500 FINLAND 30 6227 515 www samsung com fi FRANCE 01 4863 0000 www samsung com fr GERMANY 01805 SAMSUNG www samsung de 726 7864 0 14 min GUATEMALA 1 800 299 0013 www samsung com
278. ooling a print job to the hard disk proofing a job and specifying of printing a private job in the printer properties window Once you have stored files in the hard disk you can easily print or delete the stored files using the control panel of your printer Storing a job You can store jobs on the hard disk 1 Open the document you want to print 2 Select Print from the file menu The Print window appears 3 Select your machine from Select Printer list 4 Click Properties or Preferences 5 Click the Advanced tab and click Job Setting 6 Select the print mode you want from the drop down list See Using help on page 3 7 Enter the user s name and file name 8 Click OK until the Print window is displayed 9 Click OK or Print to start printing Printing or deleting a stored job You can print or delete jobs stored on the hard disk Supplies and accessories 8 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Job Management and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Stored Job and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow to highlight the user s name and file name you want use and press OK iY If the select file is a confidential print job enter the specified 4 digit password Use the up down arrow to enter digits and use the left right arrow to move between digits When you finish entering the password press OK If you
279. oom room with proper room Change room temperature temperature See temperature Environmental specifications on page 1 No Such Job You are performing an Check the display to Add Pages or Cancel Job operation but there are no jobs waiting see if there are any scheduled jobs The display should indicate if any scheduled jobs are in Standby mode for example Delay Fax Junk Fax Job received a fax from will be deleted Cancelled which is registered as a Reconfirm junk fax junk fax setup See Receiving on page 1 Line Busy The receiving fax Try again after a few The line is already engaged Try Again Later machine did not answer or the line is already engaged minutes Network problem Network cable is not connected Check it The machine is not connected with a network cable Connect the machine to the network with a network cable Line Error The Fax Line has a problem Try Again Later Your machine cannot connect with the receiving fax machine or has lost contact because of a problem with the phone line Try again If the problem persists wait an hour or so for the line to clear again Or turn the ECM mode on See Sending on page 1 Network problem Network card is not installed Check it There is a problem on the network interface Turn the power switch off and on If the problem persists call for service LSU error Error aaa Turn off then on
280. or message press Stop Clear to clear the message and try to send the fax again You can set your machine to print a confirmation report automatically each time sending a fax is completed For further details see Printing sent fax report automatically on page 9 Automatic redialing When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax the machine automatically redials the number The redial time depends on the country s factory default setting To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts See Changing the fax setup options on page 1 When the display shows Retry Redial press OK to redial the number without waiting To cancel the automatic redialing press Stop Clear Redialing the last number To redial the number you called last 1 Press Redial Pause on the control panel 2 When an original is loaded in the document feeder the machine automatically begins to send If an original is placed on the scanner glass select Yes to add another page Load another original and press OK When you have finished select No when Another Page appears Sending a fax to multiple destinations You can use the Multiple Send feature which allows you to send a fax to multiple locations Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to a remote station After transmission the originals are automatically erased from memory You cannot send a color fax using this feature
281. ort Printer port name can be name gt or ZA NetworkPortwill ba specified as IP address P lt port created by use of hostname USB local port name gt name or IEEE1284 port Standard TCP IP Port monitor For local port this port must exist on system before being specified by command name For example e IP XXX XXX XXX XXX N where XXX XXX XXX XXX means IP address for network printer p USBO001 P LPT1 p hostname e When installing the driver silently in Korean type in Setup exe s L 0x0012 or Setup exe s L 18 l lt Lang_cod e gt or L lt Lang_co de gt Sets language code Z The default language will be decided automatically if there is no specified installation language commanded The default language depends on your system locale information Decimal number and hexadecimal number can be used but hexadecimal number must have prefix with OX Refer to Language Codes section for available lt Lang_code gt This command applies to all machine s drivers and application software if specified language is supported All software included in the machine s drivers will be installed as the specified language e Setup exe s L 0x0012 or Setup exe s L 18 install setup package silently with Korean a lt dest_pat h gt or A lt dest_pat h gt Specifies destination path for installation fH The destinat
282. ou can also configure the network parameters on the SyncThru Web Service Installing a hard disk Installing the hard disk allows the data from your computer to be sent to the print queue of the printer hard disk This decreases the workload of the computer You can also use various print features such as storing a job in the hard disk proofing a job and printing private documents The order information is provided for optional hard disk See Available accessories on page 2 Installing a hard disk 1 Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine 2 Remove the screws and remove the rear cover 3 Remove the screws then lift up the cover slightly and pull the cover to the right 1 Control board cover 4 Take out a new hard disk from its plastic bag 5 Align the connector on the hard disk with the connector on the control board Push the hard disk in until it is latched into place 6 Fasten down the hard disk with the screws supplied with your new hard disk then reinstall the covers removed in steps 2 and 3 7 Reconnect the power cord and machine cable Turn on the machine 8 You must activate the added hard disk in the driver properties See Activating the added accessories in printer properties on page 4 Printing with the optional hard disk IZ After installing the optional hard disk you can use advanced printing features such as storing or sp
283. our pet If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions have been followed unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel gt Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire AN Caution Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing sef gt It can cause damage to the machine Ko Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper tray gt You may get injured S Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening gt This could result in elevated component temperatures which can cause damage or fire O Use care to avoid paper cuts when replacing paper or removing jammed paper gt You may get hurt When printing large quantities the bottom part of the paper output area may get hot Do not allow children to touch gt Children may be burned When removing jammed paper do not use tweezers or sharp metal objects gt It can cause damage to the machine O O Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray gt It could cause damage to the machine This machine s power interception device is the power cord gt To switch off the power supply remove the power cord from the electrical outlet Safety information_ 2 Installation Moving A Warning O Do not place the machine in an area with dust mmm humidity or water l
284. out the industry even among non Microsoft platforms DADF A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder DADF is a mechanism that will automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state reset or initialized DHCP A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a client server networking protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting generally information required by the client host to participate on an IP network DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module DIMM a small circuit board that holds memory DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data received fax data DNS The Domain Name Server DNS is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks such as the Internet Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact striking an ink soaked cloth ribbon against the paper much like a typewriter DPI Dots Per Inch DPI is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing Generally higher DPI results in a higher resolution more visible detail in the image a
285. ove the plug by pulling on the cord do not handle the plug with wet hands gt This could result in electric shock or fire Safety information 1 If the machine gets overheated it releases smoke makes strange noises or generates an odd odor immediately turn off the power switch and unplug the machine gt This could result in electric shock or fire AN Caution During an electrical storm or for a period of non operation remove the power plug from the electrical outlet gt This could result in electric shock or fire Be careful the paper output area is hot gt Burns could occur If the machine has been dropped or if the cabinet appears damaged unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel gt Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel gt Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire Operating method O If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet do not attempt to force it in gt Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet or this could result in electric shock O Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power telephone or PC interface cords gt This could result in electric shock or fire and or injury to y
286. oves within the machine will guide the cartridge into the correct position until it locks into Troubleshooting_ 1 place completely 5 Close the front door Ensure that the cover is securely closed AN If the front door is not completely closed the machine will not operate Clearing original document jams When an original jams while passing through the document feeder a warning message appears on the display screen A To avoid tearing the document remove the jammed document slowly and gently K To prevent document jams use the scanner glass for thick thin or mixed paper type originals Input misfeed 1 Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder 2 Open the document feeder cover 3 Gently remove the original jammed from the document feeder 4 Close the document feeder cover Reload the pages you removed if any in the document feeder Exit misfeed 1 Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder 2 Remove the misfeed original and remove the sheets from the document output tray by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands 3 Load the removed pages back into the document feeder Roller misfeed 1 Open the scanner lid 2 Remove the misfeed original and remove the sheets from the feed area by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands Troubleshooting_ 2 1 scanner lid 3 Close the scanner lid Load the re
287. ovided by the Printers configuration you can change the various properties for your machine as a printer 1 Open the Unified Driver Configurator If necessary switch to Printers configuration 2 Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties 3 The Printer Properties window opens Printer Properties General Connecton Driver Jobs Glasses The following five tabs display at the top of the window General This option allows you to change the printer location and name The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers configuration Connection This option allows you to view or select another port If you change the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use you must re configure the machine port in this tab eDriver This option allows you to view or select another machine driver By clicking Options you can set the default device options eJobs This option shows the list of print jobs Click Cancel job to cancel the selected job and select the Show completed jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list Classes This option shows the class that your machine is in Click Add to Class to add your machine to a specific class or click Remove from Class to remove the machine from the selected class 4 Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties window Printing 11 UNIX printing Proceeding the print job After inst
288. ow the instruction on the window Macintosh 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on Also your machine s IP address should have been set Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive Double click the MAC Installer folder Double click the Installer OS X icon Enter the password and click OK The Samsung Installer window opens Click Continue Read the license agreement and click Continue Click Agree to agree to the license agreement The Samsung Installer window opens Click Continue Select Easy Install and click Install Easy Install is recommended for most users All components necessary for machine operations will be installed elf you select Custom Install you can choose individual components to install 12 The message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears Click Continue SS NG a ee QI a O KO i If you select Typical installation for a network printer during the machine driver installation the SetIP program automatically runs If the machine has already configured network information close the SetIP program Go to the next step 13 After the installation is finished click Quit 14 Open the Applications folder gt Utilities gt Print Setup Utility For Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 open the Applications folder gt System Preferences and click Print amp Fax 15 Click Add on the Printer List For Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 click the
289. own until the scan type you want is highlighted and press OK 5 Press the up down until the scan setting option you want is highlighted and press OK 6 Press the up down arrow until the desired status highlights and press OK 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to set other setting options 8 When you have finished press Stop Clear to return to ready mode a eS gt Changing the default scan settings To avoid having to change the scan settings for each job you can set up default scan settings for each scan type 1 Press gt Scan Email on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Scan Setup and press OK Press OK when Change Default highlights Press the up down until the scan type you want is highlighted and press OK Press the up down until the scan setting option you want is highlighted and press OK 7 Press the up down arrow until the desired status highlights and press OK 8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to set other setting options 9 When you have finished press Stop Clear to return to ready mode ee a Scan on both sides of paper Z This is available only when you load originals into the document feeder By using the Duplex button on your machine you can set the machine to scan on both sides of paper 1 Press gt Scan Email on the control panel 2 Place originals face up in the document feeder Or you can use the scanner glass with a single or
290. ozone request your nearest Samsung dealer Mercury Safety Hg Contains Mercury Dispose According to Local State or Federal Laws U S A only Power Saver Fa This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time power consumption is automatically lowered ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U S marks For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http www energystar gov ENERGY STAR Recycling DN Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner China only Ea USC AT FAI FS AY IRD RE RAT CAA FE ME TILIA Ae 20 RIES NI Paba PEI ACR IH m IRA UBERA BEEREK IN RIN REKA KITS RS AERES o Regulatory information_ 2 Correct Disposal of This Product Waste Electrical amp Electronic Equipment Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems This marking on the product accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories e g charger headset USB cable should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them resp
291. pacities to give you more room for storing documents presentations music and videos high resolution photographs or whatever other files you want to store or move You can do the following on your machine using an USB memory device e Scan documents and save them on an USB memory device e Print data stored on an USB memory device e Format the USB memory device Your machine supports USB memory devices with FAT16 FAT32 and sector size of 512 bytes Check your USB memory device s file system from your dealer You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type connector _ m pa O X gt 4 an Use only an USB memory device with metal shielded connector D A Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine A eDo not remove the USB memory device while it is in use The machine warranty does not cover damage caused by user s misuse elf your USB memory device has certain features example security key security partition booting disk password settings and so forth do not use the USB memory device with your machine The e Backing up data e Managing USB memory files stored in the USB memory device may be corrupted or the machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see device s User s Guide Scanning to an USB memory device You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto an USB memory device There are two ways of doing this
292. peed dial number press the first digit button s and then hold down the last digit button You can also search through memory for an entry by pressing Address Book See Searching address book for an entry on page 8 Group dial numbers If you frequently send the same document to several destinations you can group these destinations and set them under a group dial number You can then use a group dial number to send a document to all of the destinations within the group You can set up to 200 0 through 199 group dial numbers using the destination s existing speed dial numbers Registering a group dial number 1 Press ps Fax on the control panel 2 Press Address Book on the control panel 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight New amp Edit and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Group Dial and press OK 5 Enter a group dial number between O and 199 and press OK Faxing 8 If an entry is already stored in the number you choose the display shows the message to allow you to change it 6 Enter the name you want and press OK For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters see Entering characters using the number keypad on page 2 7 Enter the first few letters of the speed dial s name you want 8 Press the up down arrow until the name and number you want highlights and press OK 9 Press OK when Yes highlights when Another Page appears Repeat step 7 to include other speed dial numbers into the gro
293. ply button to apply changes then click Next 9 Summary window appears Check the package information and click Next to start creating the setup package You can modify the package configuration by clicking the Back button 10 When creating the setup package is finished Packaging Completed window appears Check Open package folder upon completion if you want the created package to open automatically after it s created 11 Click Finish Silent installation Mode Silent installation mode is an installation method that does not require any user intervention Once you start the installation the machine driver and software are automatically installed on you computer You can start the silent installation by typing s or S in the command window Silent installation can also be performed by using the command script file See Create Customized Installer on page 3 Administrator s Guide Windows only 5 Command line Parameters Following table shows commands that can be used in the command window or in making a script file See Creating a setup script file on page 4 l4 Following command line are effective and operated when command is used with s or S But h H or are exceptional commands that can be operated solely Command li Definition Description ine s or Starts silent installation Installs machine drivers IS without prompting any Uls or user intervention p lt port Specifies printer p
294. pprox 20 000 pages Pick up roller Multi purpose tray Tray1 Approx 70 000 pages Optional tray 2 Friction pad Multi purpose tray Tray1 Approx 70 000 pages Optional tray 2 a lt will be affected by operating system used computing performance application software connecting method media type media size and job complexity Replacing the toner cartridge Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge When the toner cartridge reaches its estimated cartridge life e The status LED and the toner related message on the display indicates which each individual toner cartridge should be replaced e The machine stops printing Incoming faxes are saved in memory At this stage the toner cartridge needs to be replaced Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine See Available supplies on page 1 1 Using the handle completely open the front door 2 Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the cartridge from the machine AN If you open the front door be careful not to touch the underneath the control panel the lower part of the fuser unit The temperature of the fuser unit might be extremely hot and could damage your Supplies and accessories_ 2 IZ When you open the front door and work inside the machine it is highly recommend that you remove the paper transfer belt first Because the work you do could co
295. provide these numbers to the telephone company The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line and is useful for determining whether you have overloaded the line Installing several types of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls especially ringing when your line is called The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company In some cases a sum of five may not be usable on your line If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly you should immediately remove it from your telephone line as it may cause harm to the telephone network The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ TXXXX If requested this number must be provided to the telephone company A FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate this equipment In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company should notify the customer that service may be stopped However where prior notice is impractical the company may tempo
296. r 6 Click Save The name appears on the Overlay List 7 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window 8 The file is not printed Instead it is stored on your computer hard disk drive iY The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay Do not create an overlay with a watermark Using a page overlay After an overlay has been created it is ready to be printed with your document To print an overlay with a document 1 Create or open the document you want to print 2 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 3 Click the Advanced tab 4 Select the desired overlay from the Text drop down list Printing 5 5 If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop down list select Edit from the list and click Load Select the overlay file you want to use If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source you can also load the file when you access the Load window After you select the file click Open The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing Select the overlay from the Overlay List box 6 If necessary check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box If this box is checked a message window appears each time you submit a document for printing asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your document If
297. r generating file name before you proceed with the job through optional memory If the optional memory already has the same name when you entered a new file name you can rename or overwrite it 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Job Management and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight File Policy and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow to highlight the desired setting and press OK Rename If the optional memory already has the same name when you enter a new file name the file will be saved as a different name that is automatically programmed Overwrite You can set the machine to delete previous job information on optional memory as you store new job information 6 Press OK Installing a wireless network interface card Z Depending on your country wireless LAN cards may not be available Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought your printer The machine is equipped with a network interface which allows you to use your machine on a network You can also purchase a wireless network interface card to enable the use of the machine in wireless network environments See Available accessories on page 2 Installing a wireless network interface card 1 Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine 2 Remove the screws and remove the rear cover 3 Remove the s
298. r thick paper to print on both sides of paper It may cause a paper jam or damage the machine 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 Click the Basic tab 3 From the Double Sided Printing section select the binding option you want ePrinter Default If you select this option this feature is determined by the setting you ve made on the control panel of the machine None Long Edge This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding f Reverse Double Sided Printing Check this option to reverse the print order when duplex printing 4 Click the Paper tab select the Size Source and Type 5 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Change percentage of your document You can change the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by typing in a percentage you want i gt 9 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 Click the Paper tab 3 Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box You can also click the up down arrows to select the scaling rate 4 Select the Size Source and Type in Paper Options 5 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Fitting your document to a selected paper size This printer feature allows you to scal
299. rarily cease service providing that they a promptly notify the customer b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68 Regulatory information_ 5 You should also know that Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine you may experience transmission and reception problems with all the equipment It is recommended that no other equipment except for a regular telephone share the line with your machine If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the telephone lines Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers use a non emergency number to advise the emergency service dispatcher of your intentions The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular ja
300. rate Inside the machine K Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam IZ The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the machine 1 Using the handle completely open the front door A Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt Troubleshooting 4 2 Press the green release handle to release the paper transfer belt Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt lift it out of the machine 3 Remove the jammed paper by pulling in the direction shown To avoid tearing the paper pull it out gently and slowly 4 Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt align it with the slots on the inside of the front door 5 Lower the paper transfer belt until it is parallel with the front door and firmly seated 6 Close the front door to resume printing A If the front door is not completely closed the machine will not operate In exit area K Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Open and close the front door The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine If you do not see the jammed paper go to next step 2 Gently pull the paper out of the output tray a If you do not see the jammed paper or if there is any resistance when you pull stop and go to the next step Troubleshooting 5 3 Open the scan unit When the scanner lid is open
301. ray area of the Windows taskbar to active the SmarThru Office launcher 2 Click the printing icon to open the printing window 3 Select the file you want to print 4 Select the machine you want to use for printing 5 Click Print to start the job Sending a file via fax You can fax while working on SmarThru Office 1 Click the SmarThru icon a in the tray area of the Windows taskbar to active the SmarThru Office launcher 2 Click the faxing icon to open the faxing window 3 Set fax settings and click Send Fax Select Fax Machine Choose whether the machine is connected locally or via network If the machine is in network click Browse to insert the IP address and other information ePages Ready Select file you want to fax Click Add eRecipients Click Add to enter the fax number Cover page If you need a cover page enter the values for the options If not click Skip Cover Page eFax Settings If the original document is faded or not vivid click Fine In this case the fax speed could be low Sending a file to FTP You can upload files to an FTP server while working on SmarThru Office 1 Double click the SmarThru Office icon on your desktop 2 Select the file to send to FTP 3 Select File gt Send to gt Send By FTP 4 Send By FTP window opens 5 Add your file and click Upload Email You can send email while working on SmarThru Office Y You need an email client program such as Outlook Express to send e
302. ray is not Reinstall the optional Installed installed tray If the problem Tray yyy is not installed Install it persists call for service Tray2 has a problem Communication problem occurred with Tray2 The machine cannot communicate with the optional tray 2 Check the cable connecting the machine and the optional tray 2 If the problem persists call for service Tray2 Not installed Tray2 is not installed Install it The optional tray2 is not installed Install the optional tray 2 If the optional tray 2 is installed check the cable connecting the machine and the optional tray 2 If the problem persists call for service Updating Data Please Wait e The machine is updating data e This message can also appear when printing on paper smaller than A4 such as envelope or B5 In this case the machine is adjusting the settings for best print results Wait a few minutes Solving other problems The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the recommended solutions Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is corrected If the problem persists call for service Power problems WH Click this link to open an animation about power problems Troubleshooting_ 12 Condition Suggested solutions Paper feeding problems The machine is not receiving power or the printer cable connection between the computer and the machine is
303. ress An Internet Protocol IP address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard IPM The Images Per Minute IPM is a way of measuring the speed of a printer An IPM rate indicates the number of single sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute IPP The Internet Printing Protocol IPP defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs media size resolution and so forth IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers and also supports access control authentication and encryption making it a much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones IPX SPX IPX SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange Sequenced Packet Exchange It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP IP with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP and SPX having similarities to TCP IPX SPX was primarily designed for local area networks LANs and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose typically its performance exceeds that of TCP IP on a LAN ISO The International Organization for Standardization ISO is an international standard setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies It produces world wide industrial and commercial standards ITU T The International Tel
304. rinter Getting started_ 1 OS Contents Windows Printer driver Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine s features PostScript Printer Driver Use the PostScript driver to print documents with complex fonts and graphics in the PS language PostScript printer description file is included Scanner driver TWAIN and Windows Image Acquisition WIA drivers are available for scanning documents on your machine Smart Panel This program allows you to monitor the machine s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing SmarThru Office This program is the accompanying Windows based software for your multifunctional machine Samsung Scan and Fax Manager You can find out about scan and fax manager program information and installed scan driver s condition Samsung Network PC Fax You can find out about fax manager program information You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine Printer Settings Utility This program allows you to set up printer s other options from your computer desktop Direct Printing Utility CLX 6250 Series only This program allows you to print PDF files directly SetIP Use this program to set your machine s TCP IP addresses Macintosh PostScript Printer Driver Use this driver to run your machine from a Macintosh computer and print documents PostScript printer description file is included Scanner driver TWAIN driver and Image Capture
305. river Configurator on your desktop 2 Click the 3 button to switch to Scanners Configuration 3 Select the scanner on the list If you use only one machine device and it is connected to the computer and turned on your scanner appears on the list and is automatically selected If you have two or more scanners connected to your computer you can select any scanner to work at any time For example while acquisition is in progress on the first scanner you may select the second scanner set the device options and start the image acquisition simultaneously Click Properties Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the platen glass See Loading originals on page 1 From the Scanner Properties window click Preview The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the f 8 10 11 12 Preview Pane Scanner Properties Drag the pointer to set the image area to be scanned in the Preview Pane Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan Area sections Image Quality This option allows you to select the color composition and the scan resolution for the image eScan Area This option allows you to select the page size The Advanced button enables you to set the page size manually If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings select the option from the Job Type drop down list See Adding Job Type Sett
306. rom the system Secured Received Fax Allows you to store received faxes if Secure Receive menu in the control panel is On Stored Print Allows you to print documents which you have saved as Store Proof or Print Schedule in the printer driver s Job Setting option Secured Print Allows you to print documents which you have saved as Confidential in the printer driver s Job Setting option Management tools 1 Address Book tab You can store contact information such as name speed no e mail address and so on For grouping individual addresses Fax Group entry and E mail Group entry are ready Individual You can create an individual address book Click the Add button eFax Groups You can create fax group address books You can add users by clicking the Add button or by dragging the user from Individual group to Fax Groups E mail Groups You can create e mail group address books You can add users by clicking the Add button or by dragging the user from Individual group to E mail Groups Setting tab This tab allows you to set configurations provided by your machine and network You need to log in as an administrator to view this tab Machine Settings tab This tab allows you to set options provided by your machine System You can set settings related to your machine Printer You can set settings related to printing jobs Copy You can set settings related to copying jobs Fax You can set settings related to faxing
307. ront door 6 Lower the paper transfer belt until it is parallel with the front door and firmly seated 7 Close the front door to resume printing A If the front door is not completely closed the machine will not operate Necessary precautions to take when installing accessories e Disconnect the power cord To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock always disconnect the power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external accessories e Discharge static electricity The control board and internal accessories network interface card or memory module are sensitive to static electricity Before installing or removing any internal accessories discharge static electricity from your body by touching something metal such as the metal back plate on any device plugged into a grounded power source If you walk around before finishing the installation repeat this procedure to discharge any static electricity again e Activating the added accessories in the PS driver properties After installing an accessory such as an optional tray PS driver users must do the additional setting Go to the PS printer properties and set the added accessory activated When installing accessories the battery inside the machine is a service component and needs to be replaced by an authorized servicer Do not change it by yourself There is a risk of an explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect t
308. root in the Login field and enter the system password iY You must log in as a super user root to install the machine software If you are not a super user ask your system administrator 3 From the Samsung website download the Unified Linux Driver package to your computer 4 Right click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the package 5 Double click cdroot gt autorun 6 When the welcome screen appears click Next Untied Linux Driver installer Wolsome bo tha Uniled Linux Driver installailion wizard TREE program will install all necessary sofware tor prinlers and MFP devices Click Mead to continue with Mo Setup program 7 When the installation is complete click Finish The installation program has added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience If you have any difficulties consult the on screen help that is available through your system menu or can otherwise be called from the driver package Windows applications such as Unified Driver Configurator or Image Manager Installing the SmartPanel 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 When the Administrator Login window appears type in root in the Login field and enter the system password IZ You must log in as a super user root to install the machine software If you are not a super user ask your system administrator 3 From the Sams
309. round of your copies See Changing the darkness on page 1 e If there are no defects on the original clean the scan unit See Cleaning the scan unit on page 3 Copy image is skewed e Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the document feeder e Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly Blank copies print out Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the document feeder Horizontal stripes If horizontally aligned black streaks white streaks or smears appear e The toner cartridge may be installed improperly Remove the cartridge and reinsert it e The toner cartridge may be defective Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 e The machine might had a minor shock during printing or copying There is no problem with the machine Try printing again e If the problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative Image rubs off the copy easily e Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package e In high humidity areas do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time Frequent copy paper jams occur e Fan the paper then turn it over in the tray Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply Check adjust the paper guides if necessary e Ensure that the paper is the proper type and weight
310. rt the certain feature s in the following table Feature Windows Linux Macintosh Machine quality option Poster printing Multiple pages per sheet 2 4 Fit to page printing Reduce and enlarge printing Different source for first page Watermark Overlay Double sided printing duplex a The machine with duplex feature prints both side of a paper e Supported Blank Not supported Printing_ 1 Basic printing Your machine allows you to print from various Windows Macintosh Linux or UNIX applications The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application you use LY eYour Printing Preferences window that appears in this user s guide may differ depending on the machine in use However the composition of the Printing Preferences window is similar Check the operating system s that are compatible with your machine See System requirements on page 2 When you select an option in Printing Preferences you may see a warning mark or 4h An exclamation mark 4 means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended and 3 mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine s setting or environment The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing from various Windows applications Z eMacintosh basic printing See Macintosh printing on page 9 eLinux basic printing See
311. rticles can accumulate inside the machine This buildup can cause print quality problems such as toner specks or smearing Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems 1 Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord Wait for the machine to cool down 2 Using the handle completely open the front door 3 Press the green release handle to release the paper transfer belt Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt lift it out of the machine do not touch surface of belt l4 When you open the front door and work inside the machine it is highly recommend that you remove the paper transfer belt first Because the work you do could contaminate the paper transfer belt 4 Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull the cartridge out AN If you open the front door be careful not to touch the underneath the control panel the lower part of the fuser unit The temperature of the fuser unit might be extremely hot and could damage your skin Maintenance_ 2 5 With a dry lint free cloth wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the toner cartridge area AN While cleaning the inside of the machine be careful not to damage the transfer roller or any other inside parts Do not use solvents such as benzene or thinner to clean Printing quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine 6 Locate the long strip of glass LSU in
312. s The selected fax is deleted from memory 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Sending a priority fax This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of reserved operations The original is scanned into memory and immediately transmitted when the current operation is finished In addition priority transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple destinations between stations example when the transmission to station A ends before transmission to station B begins or between redial attempts 1 Press amp Fax on the control panel 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs See Adjusting the document settings on page 6 Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Priority Send and press OK Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK You can press speed dial numbers or select group dial number using Address book button For details see Setting up address book on page 8 Enter the job name you want and press OK The original is scanned into memory before transmission 9 If an original is placed on the scanner glass select Yes to add another pages Load another original and press OK When you have finished select No when Another Page appears The machin
313. s silent installation with this customized script file ex lt file_server gt CD setup exe Is li c temp1CONFIG C13 1 2 Make sure that the machine is connected to the network or USB and powered on Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive The software CD should automatically run and an installation window appears elf the installation window does not appear click Start and then Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive Click OK elf you use Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start gt All programs gt Accessories gt Run Type X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive and click OK 10 11 elf the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Continue in the User Account Control windows elf the AutoPlay window appears in Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Run Setup exe in Install or run program field and click Yes in the User Account Control windows Select Administrator Installation gt Create Customized Installer If necessary select a language from the drop down list Read License Agreement and select accept the terms of the License Agreement Then click Next Select Package Type window appears Select Generate a Setup script file If you place the mouse cursor over the package type you can see th
314. se harmful interference and e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help 4 Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Canadian Radio Interference Regulations This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio
315. side the machine and using a cotton swab gently clean the 4 pieces of LSU glass LE 7 Slide the toner cartridge back into the machine 8 Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt align it with the slots on the inside of the front door 9 Lower the paper transfer belt until it is parallel with the front door and firmly seated 10 Close the front door Ensure that the cover is securely closed A If the front door is not completely closed the machine will not operate 11 Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on Cleaning the scan unit Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the scanner lid 3 Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and the document feeder glass until it is clean and dry Maintenance_ 3 1 Scanner lid 2 Scanner glass 3 Document feeder glass 4 White bar 4 Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean and dry 5 Close the scanner lid Storing the toner cartridge Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light temperature and humidity Samsung suggests users follow the recommendations below to ensure the optimum performance highest quality and longest l
316. ssword 13 Enter the Path for saving the scanned image 14 Click Apply ae eS Setting up an SMB server To use an SMB server you need to set up parameters for access to SMB servers using SyncThru Web Service 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a your web browser 3 Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service 4 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website A log in page appears 5 Type in the ID and Password then click Login If it s your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service type in the below default ID and password ID admin Password sec00000 6 Click Address Book gt Individual 7 Click Add 8 Check the box next to Add SMB 9 Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name 10 Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 139 11 Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name 12 Check the box next to Anonymous if you want to permit unauthorized persons to access the SMB server This box is unchecked by default 13 Enter the Login Name and Password 14 Enter the Domain If your server is joined to the certain domain and you are using the domain account to log in enter the domain name Otherwise just enter your computer name which is registered to the SMB server 15 Enter the Path for saving the scanned image The
317. stack on the output tray and the output support will help the printed pages to align For the output support to correctly align the pages you need to pull it out appropriately depending on the paper size 1 Output support 2 Extension IZ elf paper coming out of the output try has problems such as excessive curl try printing to the rear door elf the output support is incorrectly adjusted printed pages may be mis aligned or fall Media and tray_ 7 For Letter sized paper Pull out the output support to the location indicated LTR as shown and unfold the extension For A4 or Legal sized paper Pull out the output support to the location indicated A4 LGL as shown and unfold the extension Media and tray_ 8 printing This chapter explains common printing tasks This chapter includes e Introducing useful software programs e Printer driver features e Basic printing e Opening printing preferences e Using help e Using special print features e Postscript options e Using direct printing utility CLX 6250 Series only Z The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows XP Introducing useful software programs Samsung AnyWeb Print This tool helps you to screen capture preview scrap and print the screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily than when you use the ordinary program Click Start gt All programs gt Samsung Printers gt Samsu
318. staller Overview Samsung provides convenient installation methods useful for administrators Administrators can remotely install the machine driver to multiple client computers or use command window to install the driver at once Administrators can also make their own installation package for distribution Check the system requirements before installing the machine s driver See System requirements on page 2 Remote installation Remote Installation is provided under Administrator Installation menu It is provided for administrators to remotely install device drivers and application software to multiple client computers To use remote installation you must configure at least one group Multiple client computers can be added to a group that has the same installation configuration Installation configuration includes device drivers or application software to be installed port used for printing default printer printer name sharing information and etc l4 For remote installation all client computers must be joined to a domain or a workgroup and file sharing must be enabled to be accessed by remote installer software on both server and client sides If you cannot access the client computers you might need to disable the Firewall option on the client computers Domain remote installation l4 You need to be a member of domain administrator to use Domain Remote Installation 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to the n
319. steps 5 through 6 as needed Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Pa gt 8 While you are setting copy options pressing Stop Clear cancels the changed settings and restores the defaults Using special copy features You can use the following copy features ID card copying Your machine can print 2 sided originals on one sheet of A4 Letter Legal Folio Executive B5 A5 or A6 sized paper The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original This feature is helpful for copying a small sized item such as a business card K eThis copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass eThe size of the 2 sided originals should be smaller than A5 if not some of it won t be copied 1 Press ID Copy on the control panel 2 Place Front Side Press appears on the display 3 Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown and close the scanner lid 4 Press Start on the control panel Your machine begins scanning the front side and shows Place Rear Side Press 5 Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown then close the scanner lid 6 Press Start on the control panel to begin copying IZ elf the original is larger than the printable area some portions may
320. t Forward and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Receive Forward and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been completed select Forward amp Print 8 Enter the number of the fax machine to which faxes are to be sent and press OK 9 Enter the starting time using up down left right arrow or numeric keypad and press OK 10 Enter the ending time using up down left right arrow or numeric keypad and press OK 11 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Subsequent received faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine Ae O eS KO Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an email Press ps Fax on the control panel 1 2 Press Menu on the control panel 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Forward and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow to highlight Email and press OK 6 Press the up down arrow to highlight Send Forward and press OK 7 Press the up down arrow to highlight On and press OK 8 Enter your email address and press OK 9 Enter the email address to which faxes are to be sent and press OK 10 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified email address Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an ema
321. t Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X Or if you are a Windows user you can launch it from the Start menu select Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt your printer driver name gt Smart Panel Click Printer Setting Click Emulation Confirm if PCL is selected in Emulation Setting Click Apply Following information shows the proper font list for corresponding languages Russian CP866 ISO 8859 5 Latin Cyrillic eHebrew Hebrew 15Q Hebrew 8 Hebrew 7 Israel only Greek ISO 8859 7 Latin Greek PC 8 Latin Greek eArabic amp Farsi HP Arabic 8 Windows Arabic Code Page 864 Farsi ISO 8859 6 Latin Arabic OCR OCR A OCR B media and tray This chapter provides information on how to load originals and print media into your machine This chapter includes e Preparing originals e Loading originals e Selecting print media e Changing the tray size Preparing originals e Do not load paper smaller than 142 x 148 mm 5 6 x 5 8 inches or larger than 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches e Do not attempt to load the following types of paper in order to prevent paper jam low print quality and machine damage Carbon paper or carbon backed paper Coated paper Onion skin or thin paper Wrinkled or creased paper Curled or rolled paper Torn paper Used paper Something previously printed on side one e Remove all staples and paper clips before loading e Make sure any glue ink or correction flui
322. t to On allows you to store received faxes in the common box Change default Option Description Resolution Changing the resolution setting affects the appearance of the received document e Standard Originals with normal sized characters e Fine Originals containing small characters or thin lines or originals printed using a dot matrix printer e Super Fine Originals containing extremely fine detail Super Fine mode is enabled only if the machine with which you are communicating also supports the Super Fine resolution IZ For memory transmission Super Fine mode is not available The resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine eWhen your machine is set to Super Fine resolution and the fax machine with which you are communicating does not support Super Fine resolution the machine transmits using the highest resolution mode supported by the other fax machine e Photo Fax Originals containing shades of gray or photographs Darkness You can select the default contrast mode to fax your originals lighter or darker Scan Size Sets the image size if The scan size options may vary between document feeder or scanner glass Auto Report You can set the machine to print a report with detailed information about the previous 50 communication operations including time and dates For further details see Printing sent fax report automatically on page 9 Copy setup
323. t to turn the power off If you choose Yes the power is turned off This button must then be used to turn the button on Status Description Off The machine is not in the power save mode Blue On The machine is in the power save mode IZ In the following cases the machine wakes up from the power save mode Data is received Front door or scan unit is opened Control panel key is pressed ePower switch turn the power on and off Introduction 5 getting started This chapter gives you step by step instructions for setting up the USB connected machine and software This chapter includes e Setting up the hardware e Printing a demo page e Supplied software Setting up the hardware This section shows the steps to set up the hardware as is explained in the Quick Install Guide Make sure you read the Quick Install Guide first and follow the steps below 1 Select a stable location Select a level stable place with adequate space for air circulation Allow extra space to open covers and trays The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat cold and humidity Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table wn oO O Ta N 1 100 mm 100 mm gt 3 9 inches 3 9 inches 482 6 mm 18 8 inches AA IAN SARA AA JA ABA et Re A EN J Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1 000 m 3 281 ft Refer to the a
324. ter Setting Settings Utility window Some machines do not have this feature 4 K If you connect your machine to a network the SyncThru Web Service window appears instead of the Printer Settings Utility window Driver Setting Set all of the machine options you need in the Printing Preferences window This feature is 5 available only for Windows See Opening printing preferences on page 2 Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings Right click in Windows or Linux or click in Mac OS X the Smart Panel icon and select Options Select the settings you want from the Options window Smarthru Office The supplied software CD provides you with SmarThru Office SmarThru Office offers you convenient features to use with your machine Starting SmarThru Office Follow the steps below to start SmarThru Office 1 Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly connected to each other 2 Once you have installed SmarThru Office you will see the SmarThru Office icon on your desktop 3 Double click the SmarThru Office icon Siar lor Office l4 This menu displays direct buttons for some features The direct buttons include Categories Binder Life Cycle Scan and OCR Fix and Enhance and Samsung Website You can disable this menu by checking Do not show this diaglog again an i al 5 i 3 4 The SmarThru Office appears For more information about SmarThru
325. th a USB port Windows XP 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 1 3 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Scanners and Cameras 4 Double click your scanner driver icon The Scanner and Camera Wizard appears 5 Click Next 6 Set the option in Choose scanning preferences window and click Preview to see how your options affect the picture 7 Click Next 8 Enter a picture name and select a file format and destination to save the picture 9 Your picture has been successfully copied to your computer Choose one of the options on screen 10 Click Next 11 Click Finish Scanning 6 Windows Vista 1 2 5 6 T iY Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Scanners and Cameras Double click Scan a document or picture Windows Fax and Scan application appears K eYou can click on View scanners and cameras to view scanners elf there is no Scan a document or picture open the MS paint program and from the File click From Scanner or Camera Click New Scan Sca
326. the Print window 7 You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together 4 Printing booklets This feature prints your document on both sides of a paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet if If you want to make a booklet you need to print on Letter Legal A4 US Folio or Oficio sized print media 1 To change the print settings from your software application access the Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 2 Click the Basic tab select Booklet Printing from the Type drop down list 3 Click the Paper tab select the Size Source and Type IZ The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes In order to find out the available paper size for this feature select the available paper size in the Size option on the Paper tab If you select an unavailable paper size this option can be automatically canceled Select only available paper paper without a OF amp mark 4 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window 5 After printing fold and staple the pages Printing on both sides of paper You can print on both sides of a paper duplex Before printing decide how you want your document oriented You can use this feature with Letter Legal A4 US Folio or Oficio sized paper We recommend not to print on both sides of the special media such as labels envelopes o
327. the machine Optional tray 2 e Multi purpose tray Fax mode Letter A4 Legal e Tray 1 e Optional tray 2 Letter A4 Legal Folio Tray 1 Oficio e Optional tray 2 e Multi purpose tray Duplex printing a 75 to 105 g m 20 28 Ib bond only Media and tray 2 Changing the tray size The tray is preset to Letter or A4 size depending on your country To change the size you need to adjust the paper guides 1 Tray extend lever 2 Paper length guide 3 Paper width guide 1 Hold the tray with one hand and with the other hand squeeze and slide the paper length guide to locate them in the correct paper size slot marked at the bottom of the tray 2 Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading papers 3 After inserting paper into the tray squeeze the paper width guides and paper length guide Then slide them to the desired paper size marked at the bottom of the tray 1 Paper length guide 2 Paper width guide iH eDo not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to warp elf you do not adjust the paper width guide it may cause paper jams Loading paper in the tray Tray 1 optional tray 2 Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs into tray 1 Tray 1 can hold a maximum of 250 sheets of plain paper You can purchase an optional tray and attach it below the standard tray to load an addition
328. the number keypad and press OK Z If you set a time earier than the current time the fax will be sent at that time on the following day The original is scanned into memory before transmission 13 If an original is placed on the scanner glass select Yes to add another pages Load another original and press OK When you have finished select No when Another Page appears The machine returns to ready mode The display reminds you that you are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job You can add additional documents to the delayed fax job which is saved in memory 1 Load the originals to be added and adjust document settings 2 Press Menu on the control panel 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Add Pages and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow until the fax job you want appears and press OK When you have finished select No when Another Page appears The machine scans the original into memory Faxing_ 3 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Canceling a reserved delay fax job You can cancel the delayed fax job which is saved in memory 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Cancel Job and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow until the fax job you want appears and press OK 5 Press OK when Yes highlight
329. the scan unit cannot be opened Do not force the scan unit open it can cause damage to the machine Close the scanner lid before opening the scan unit 4 Open the fuser cover 5 Open the inner cover Do not touch the fuser inside the inner cover It is hot and could cause burns 6 Pull up the paper jam lever in the direction of the arrow to separate the fuser rollers and carefully remove the jammed paper from the unit 7 Press down the paper jam lever to reapply pressure to the rollers 8 Close the inner cover 4 Before closing the inner cover the jam lever must be fastened first step7 Otherwise paper jam can occur If you do not see the jammed paper or if there is any resistance when you pull stop and go to the next step 9 Open the inner cover of reverse unit and carefully remove the jammed paper out of the machine If there is any resistance removing the paper or difficulty picking up jammed paper stop pulling and turn the release knob to the direction as Troubleshooting 6 shown to remove the misfed paper SSN a IA Zo Va 10 Close the inner cover of the reverse unit In the duplex unit area 4 Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Open the front door AN Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt 11 Lowering down the scan unit gently and slowly until it is completely closed Mak
330. the up down arrow to highlight Paper Type and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow to select the paper tray you want and press OK 6 Press the up down arrow to select the paper type you want 7 Press OK to save the selection 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Setting the paper source 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Paper Setup and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Paper Source and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow to highlight Copy Tray or Fax Tray and press OK 6 Press the up down arrow to select the paper tray you want 7 Press OK to save the selection 8 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode In the computer Windows 1 Click the Windows Start menu 2 For Windows 2000 select Settings gt Printers For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes For Windows 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers 3 Right click your machine 4 For Windows XP 2003 2008 Vista press Printing Preferences For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 from context menus select the Printing Preferences iY If Printing Preferences item has B mark you can select other printer drivers connected with se
331. this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected the overlay automatically prints with your document 7 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window The selected overlay prints on your document i The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay Deleting a page overlay You can delete page overlays that you no longer use 1 In the Printing Preferences window click the Advanced tab 2 Select Edit in the Overlay drop down list 3 Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box 4 Click Delete 5 When a confirming message window appears click Yes 6 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Job Setting CLX 6250 Series only This option allows you to choose how to print the printing file by using the 512 MB optional memory or hard disk Store Spool Normal Proof and Print Schedule mode is available only if you have installed the optional hard disk e Print Mode The default Print Mode is Normal which is for printing without saving the printing file in the memory Normal This mode prints without storing your document in the optional memory Proof This mode is useful when you print more than one copy You can print one copy first to check then print the rest of copies later Confidential This mode is used for printing confidential document You need to enter a password to print Store Select this setting to save a d
332. tically prints the fax Adjusting the document settings Before starting a fax change the following settings according to your original s status to get the best quality Resolution The default document settings procedure good results when using typical text based originals However if you send originals that are of poor quality or contain photographs you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality fax 1 Press amp Fax on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax Feature and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Resolution and press OK Press the up down arrow until the option you want is highlighted and press OK 6 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Recommended resolution settings for different original document types are described in the table below AB ON mode recommended for Standard Originals with normal sized characters Fine Originals containing small characters or thin lines or originals printed using a dot matrix printer mode recommended for Super Fine Originals containing extremely fine detail Super Fine mode is enabled only if the machine with which you are communicating also supports the Super Fine resolution iY For memory transmission Super Fine mode is not available The resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine When your machine is set to Super Fine resolution and the fax m
333. ting 16 Condition Suggested Solutions Condition Suggested Solutions Toner smear If toner smears on the page Clean the inside of the machine See Cleaning the inside on page 2 Check the paper type and quality See Print media specifications on page 3 Remove the toner cartridge and then install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 Page skew e Ensure that the paper is loaded properly e Check the paper type and quality See Print media specifications on page 3 e Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack Vertical repetitive defects AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals The toner cartridge may be damaged If you still have the same problem remove the toner cartridge and install a new one See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 2 Parts of the machine may have toner on them If the defects occur on the back of the page the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages The fusing assembly may be damaged Contact a service representative e Ensure that the paper is loaded properly e Check the paper type and quality Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl See Print media specifications on page 3 e Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray
334. ting to Color typically produces the best possible print quality for color document If you want to print a color document in gray scale select Grayscale BlackOptimization allows you to print in high quality black If you use this option it might take longer to print To adjust color manually select Advanced in Color Mode Simply slide the color balance slider in the Levels tab to adjust color or select Matching tab for driver provided color correction for general image processing Font Text Select Darken Text to print texts darker than on a normal document Use All Text Black to prints solid black regardless of the color it appears on the screen You can set advanced settings by clicking the Advanced button True Type Options This option determines what the driver tells the printer about how to image the text in your document Select the appropriate setting according to the status of your document Use Printer Fonts When Use Printer Fonts is checked the printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory resident fonts to print your document rather than downloading the fonts used in your document Because downloading fonts takes time selecting this option can speed up your printing time When using Printer fonts the printer will try to match the fonts used in your document to those stored in its memory If however you use fonts in your document that are very different from those resident in the printer your printed
335. tivates fax mode Fax ps Copy Activates copy mode Scan Email gt Activates scan mode OK Confirms the selection on the screen Arrow Scroll through the options available in the selected menu and increase or decrease values Menu Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus See Machine status and advanced feature on page 1 Back Sends you back to the upper menu level Numeric keypad Dials fax number and enters the number value for document copies or other options Address Book Allows you to store frequently used fax numbers and email addresses or search for stored fax numbers or email addresses Redial Pause In standby mode redials the last number Also in edit mode inserts a pause into a fax number On Hook Dial Enable you dial a number with the receiver on the hook Stop Clear Stops an operation at any time The pop up window appears on the screen showing the current job that the user can stop or resume Cd EF HE EG BEH CF Power Saver O ai KN ta Sends the machine into power saver mode If you press and hold this button you can also turn the power on and off See Power Saver button on page 5 Introduction 3 Start Starts a job in black or color mode Introduction_ 4 Understanding the Status LED The color of the Status indicates the machine s current status Status Description Off e The machine is off line
336. to 70 g m 16 to 19 Ibs bond section e 250 sheets of 80 g m7 20 Ibs 100 sheets bond f or tray1 e 500 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ibs bond for optional tray Thicker paper Refer to the Plain paper Refer to the Plain paper section section Extra thick Refer to the Plain paper Refer to the Plain paper section section Labels Refer to the Plain paper Refer to the Plain paper section section Card stock Refer to the Plain paper Refer to the Plain paper section section Glossy Photo Refer to the Plain paper 100 x 150 mm 4 x 6 inches Matte Photo section Not available in tray1 optional 106 to 120 g m 28 to 32 Ibs bond tray e 10 sheets 120 to 170 g m 32 to 46 Ibs bond e 10 sheets 120 to 150 g m 32 to 40 Ibs bond e 10 sheets 171 to 220 g m 46 to 59 Ibs bond e 5 sheets 111 to 220 g m 30 to 59 Ibs bond e 1 sheet Minimum size custom 98 x 148 mm 3 9 x 5 8 inches Maximum size custom 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches a f media weight is over 105 g m 28 Ib bond load a paper into the multi purpose tray one by one Specifications 3 b Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight thickness and environmental conditions c Smoothness 100 to 250 sheffield Specifications 4 administrator s guide windows only This chapter gives helpful information and troubleshooting tips for system administrators using Samsung In
337. to purchase To order Genuine Samsung supplies accessories and maintenance parts contact your local Samsung dealer or the authorized retailer where you purchased your machine You can also visit www samsung com supplies select your country region and obtain information on calling for service Available supplies When supplies reach their lifespan you can order the following types of supplies for your machine Type Average yield Part name TONER e Average continuous K508 CLT K508S Black CARTRIDGES black cartridge yield C508 CLT C508S Cyan Standard yield 2 500 standard pages M508 CLT M5088 Black Magenta e Average continuous Y508 CLT Y508S Yellow colored cartridge yield Region AY 2 000 standard pages ellon Mageniai ani N C5082 CLT C5082S Cyan M5082 CLT M5082S Magenta Y5082 CLT Y5082S Yellow e Necessary precautions to take when installing accessories e Activating the added accessories in printer properties e Upgrading a memory module e Installing a wireless network interface card e Installing a hard disk e Checking replaceable s lifespan Type Average yield Part name TONER e Average continuous K508L CLT K508L Black CARTRIDGES black cartridge yield C508L CLT C508L Cyan High yield 5 000 standard pages M508L CLT M508L Black Magenta e Average continuous Y508L CLT Y508L colored cartridge yield Yellow 4 000 standard pages b Yellow Magenta Cyan
338. trol panel The machine starts to scan and send a fax to destinations l4 elf you want to send fax directly from your computer use SmarThru Office See Using SmarThru Office on page 3 eWhen you want to cancel a fax job press Stop Clear before the machine start transmission elf you used the scanner glass the machine shows the message asking to place another page While the machine is sending a fax you can not send an email at the same time Sending a fax manually This method is sending a fax using On Hook Dial on the control panel 1 Press ps Fax on the control panel 2 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs See Adjusting the document settings on page 6 4 Press On Hook Dial on the control panel Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel 6 Press Start when you hear a high pitched fax signal from the remote fax machine i Faxing_ 2 When you want to cancel a fax job press Stop Clear at any time while sending Confirming a transmission When the last page of your original has been sent successfully the machine beeps and returns to ready mode When something goes wrong while sending your fax an error message appears on the display For a list of error messages and their meanings see Understanding display messages on page 8 If you receive an err
339. umber is 110 N Scanning_ 1 Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment 1 Load originals face up into the document feeder or place a single original face down on the scanner glass See Loading originals on page 1 2 Press gt Scan Email on the control panel 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Scan To Email and press OK iH If you registered My Log in ID Password and checked Local Authentication in User Access Control on SyncThru Web Service Login Name and Enter Password appear Enter the Auth ID and Password to your machine Go to step 5 4 When From appears on the top line of the display enter the sender s email address and press OK 5 When Destination Email appears on the top line of the display enter the recipient s email address and press OK 6 To enter additional addresses press the left right arrow to highlight Yes and press OK To continue to the next step press the left right arrow to highlight No and press OK 7 Ifthe displays asks if you want to send the email to your account press the left right arrow to highlight Yes or No and press OK l4 This prompt does not appear if you have activated the Auto Send To Self option in the Settings gt Scan gt Scan To E mail on SyncThru Web Service 8 Enter an email subject and press OK 9 Press the up down arrow until the file type you want is highlighted and press OK When you have finishe
340. ument Format PDF is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format PostScript PostScript PS is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas that is run in an interpreter to generate an image Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer Print Media The media like paper envelopes labels and transparencies which can be used in a printer a scanner a fax or a copier Glossary_ 4 PPM Pages Per Minute PPM is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute PRN file An interface for a device driver this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input output system calls which simplifies many tasks Protocol A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection communication and data transfer between two computing endpoints PS See PostScript PSTN The Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN is the network of the world s public circuit switched telephone networks which on industrial premises is usually routed through the switchboard RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS is a protocol for remote user authentication and accounting
341. ung Scan amp Fax Manager eFor Macintosh from the Smart Panel menu on status bar click Samsung Scan amp Fax Manager 2 Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan amp Fax Manager 3 Click Properties Use Set Fax Receiving to change the fax settings 5 When setting is done press OK gt Set Fax Receiving tab eEnable Fax Receiving You can select whether to use or not File Format You can convert the received faxes to PDF or TIFF Save Location Selects location to save the converted faxes ePrefix Selects file or folder scheme as prefix eNotify me when fax received Shows popup window to notify receiving a fax e Print received fax After receiving the fax set prints information for the received fax Change Port tab eLocal Scanner Select when your machine is connected via USB or LPT port Network Scanner Select when your machine is connected via network port Auto detection on the network Automatically detects your machine IP or Host name Enter in your machine s IP address or host name to detect your machine Sending a fax This part explains how to send a fax and the special methods of transmission When you place the originals in the document feeder and or on the platen glass one at a time See Loading originals on page 1 If the originals are placed on both the document feeder and the scanner glass the machine will read the originals on the document feeder first which has hi
342. ung website download the Smart Panel package to your computer 4 Right click the Smart Panel package and extract the package 5 Double click cdroot gt Linux gt smartpanel gt install sh Installing the Printer Setting Utility 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 When the Administrator Login window appears type in root in the Login field and enter the system password IZ You must log in as a super user root to install the machine software If you are not a super user ask your system administrator 3 From the Samsung website download the Printer Setting Utility package to your computer 4 Right click the Printer Setting Utility package and extract the package 5 Double click cdroot gt Linux gt psu gt install sh K If the printer driver does not work properly uninstall the driver and reinstall it again Follow the steps below to uninstall the driver for Linux Getting started_ 5 a Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on b When the Administrator Login window appears type in root in the Login field and enter the system password You must log in as a super user root to uninstall the printer driver If you are not a Super user ask your system administrator c Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop When the Terminal screen appears type in root localhost root cd opt Samsung mfp uninstall root localhost uninstall
343. up 10 When you have finished press the left right arrow to select No when Another Page appears and press OK 11 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Editing a group dial number 1 Press amp Fax on the control panel 2 Press Address Book on the control panel 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight New amp Edit and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Group Dial and press OK 5 Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK 6 Enter the name you want to edit and press OK 7 Enter the first few letters of the speed dial s name you want to add or delete 8 Press the up down arrow until the name and number you want highlights and press OK If you entered a new speed dial number Add appears If you enter a speed dial number stored in the group Delete appears 9 Press OK to add or delete the number 10 Press OK when Yes highlights to add or delete more numbers and repeat steps 7 and 8 11 When you have finished press the left right arrow to select No at the Another Number and press OK 12 Press Stop Clear to return to ready mode Using group dial numbers To use a group dial entry you need to search for and select it from memory When you are prompted to enter a fax number while sending a fax press Address Book See below Searching address book for an entry There are two ways to search for a number in memory You can either scan from A to Z sequentially or you can search by
344. ur machine in Bonjour Devices If you want to scan using TWAIN refer to the Mac OS X 10 4 steps above Set the scan options on this program Scan and save your scanned image eFor more information about using Image Capture refer to the Image Capture s help Use TWAIN compliant software to apply more scan options eYou can also scan using TWAIN compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop Scan process differ according to TWAIN compliant software Please refer to the user s guide of the software elf scanning does not operate in Image Capture update Mac OS to the latest version Image Capture operates properly Mac OS X 10 4 7 or higher Setting scan information in Scan Manager To find out about Scan Manager program information to check the installed scan driver s condition to change scan settings and to add or delete the folders where scanned documents to computer are saved in Scan Manager program follow these instructions 1 From the Smart Panel menu on Status bar click Scan Manager 2 Select the appropriate machine from the Scan Manager 3 Press Properties 4 Use Set Scan Button to change the file destination or scan settings to add or delete application programs and to format files You can change the scanning machine by using Change port Local or Network 5 When done press OK Linux scanning You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator window Scanning Double click the Unified D
345. ur machine to use it on your network This chapter will show you how this is easily accomplished You can use network after connecting network cable to a corresponding port on your machine Printing configuration report You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine s control panel that will show the current machine s network settings This will help you to set up a network and troubleshoot problems 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Report and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Network Info and press OK Network setup 1 5 Press OK when Yes highlights to confirm printing The Network Configuration Report prints Using this Network Configuration Report you can find your machine MAC address and IP address For example e MAC Address 00 15 99 41 A2 78 e IP Address 192 0 0 192 Setting IPv4 address You must set up an IPv4 address for network printing and management In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server located on the network Z If you use IPv6 address refer to IPv6 Configuration on page 6 In a few situations the IP address must be s
346. us job information on hard disk drive HDD as you store new job information 6 Press OK Deleting residual image data Image Overwrite is a security measure for customers who are concerned about unauthorized access and duplication of classified or private document 1 Press Menu on the control panel 2 Press the up down arrow to highlight System Setup and press OK 3 Press the up down arrow to highlight Job Management and press OK 4 Press the up down arrow to highlight Image Overwrite and press OK 5 Press the up down arrow to highlight the desired setting and press OK Immediate All residual image data from the machine will be erased immediately after each job has been processed On Demand This option provides an on demand facility for a system administrator to erase all the real image data remained in hard disk drive HDD after this option enabled All existing jobs will be deleted regardless of their status and all job submissions will be prohibited for the duration of the overwrite 6 Press the up down arrow to move to On or Off for Immediate Press the up down arrow to move to Enable or Disable for On Demand iY If you selected On Demand enabled the machine confirms if the overwrite feature starts now Press the up down arrow to select Yes or No If you select Yes On Demand overwrite starts as soon as you select Yes If you select No this feature will be enabled 7 Press OK Checking replaceable s lifespan
347. ut setting the paper type and size on the control panel See Setting the paper size and type on page 7 The settings made from the machine driver override the settings on the control panel a To print in application open an application and start the print menu b Open Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on page 2 c Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences and select an appropriate paper type For example if you want to use a label set the paper type to Label d Select Manual Feeder in paper source then press OK e Start printing in application f After printing close the multi purpose tray Printing on special media The table below shows the available special media for each tray When using special media we recommend you feed one paper at a time Check the maximum input number of media for each tray See Thick 90 to 105 g m 24 to 28 Ib thick paper Thicker 106 to 120 g m 28 to 32 Ib thicker paper Extra Thick 120 to 170 g m 32 to 46 Ib extra thick Thin 60 to 70 g m 16 to 19 Ib thin paper Cotton 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib cotton paper Color 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib color backgrounded paper Preprinted 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib preprinted letterhead paper Recycled 70 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ib recycled paper When you use recycled paper as a used paper printouts might be wrinkled and or jamming may occur due to excessive curl Envelope 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib e
348. ution Gives users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical A Do not touch the green surface of the damage or malfunction toner cartridge Footnote Provides additional more detailed information on certain words or a phrase a pages per minute Cross reference Guides users to a reference page for the additional detailed information See Finding more information About this user s guide 1 Finding more information You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources either as a print out or on screen Material name Description Quick Install Guide This guide provides basic information on setting up your machine User s Guide This guide provides you with step by step instructions for using your machine s full features and contains information for maintaining your machine troubleshooting and replacing supplies Driver Help This help provides you with help information on printer driver and instructions for setting up the options for printing See Using help on page 3 Samsung website If you have Internet access you can get help support machine drivers manuals and order information from the Samsung website www samsung com printer Downloadable You can download useful software from the Samsung website software e SyncThru Web Admin Service convenient for network administrators who need to manage many machines simultaneously
349. ween you either an individual or a single entity and Samsung Electronics Co Ltd SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS with respect to the SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS product identified above The SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS software product may include associated software components media printed materials and online or electronic documentation SOFTWARE PRODUCT By installing copying downloading or using the SOFTWARE PRODUCT you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA If you do not agree to the terms of this EULA you may not install or use the SOFTWARE PRODUCT The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is protected by both copyright law and computer program protection laws 1 GRANT OF LICENSE Samsung grants you only the number of license that you purchase for using the software You cannot modify the Software or disable any licensing or control features of the Software MIT accept the terms of the License Agreement The program searches the machine iY If your machine is not found in the network or locally the following window will appear Printers Not Found Please carefully read the notice about search resus Setup was unable to detect any network or locally connected printers Click Search again or Direct Input For assistance to find a printer Note If the cable has been disconnected from your computer this might prevent setup from detecting any printers Please check the cables or dick Help for more information C Check f you want to insta
350. wireless Wi Fi computer networks which was created to improve upon the security features of WEP WPA PSK WPA PSK WPA Pre Shared Key is special mode of WPA for small business or home users A shared key or password is configured in the wireless access point WAP and any wireless laptop or desktop devices WPA PSK generates a unique key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security XPS XML Paper Specification XPS is a specification for a Page Description Language PDL and a new document format which has benefits for portable document and electronic document developed by Microsoft It is an XML based specification based on a new print path and a vector based device independent document format
351. xtension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT socket You can easily suspend or change DRPD at any time Before using the DRPD option Distinctive Ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company To set up DRPD you will need another telephone line at your location or someone available to dial your fax number from outside To set up the DRPD mode 1 Press amp Fax on the control panel Press Menu on the control panel Press the up down arrow to highlight Fax Setup and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight Receiving and press OK Press the up down arrow to highlight DRPD Mode and press OK Waiting Ring appears on the display 6 Call your fax number from another telephone It is not necessary to place the call from a fax machine 7 When your machine begins to ring do not answer the call The machine requires several rings to learn the pattern When the machine completes learning the display shows Completed DRPD Setup If the DRPD setup fails Error DRPD Ring appears Press OK when DRPD appears and start over from step 6 CE GA NO l4 eDRPD must be set up again if you re assign your fax number or connect the machine to another telephone line eAfter DRPD has been set up call your fax number again to verify that the machine answers with a fax tone Then have a call placed to a different number assigned to that same line to be sure the call is forwarded to the extensi
352. y If the paper does not move when you pull or if you do not see the paper in this area check the fuser area around the toner cartridge See Inside the machine on page 4 4 Insert tray 1 back into the machine until it snaps into place Printing automatically resumes In optional tray 2 i Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam Troubleshooting 3 1 Pull out optional tray 2 2 Remove the jammed paper by pulling in the direction shown To avoid tearing the paper pull it out gently and slowly If the paper does not move when you pull or if you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to the next step 3 Pull tray 1 half way out 4 Ifyou see the jammed paper remove the paper from the machine by gently pulling it straight out 5 Insert the trays back into the machine Printing automatically resumes In the multi purpose tray Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Ifthe paper is not feeding properly pull the paper out of the machine If you cannot find the jammed paper or if there is any resistance removing the paper stop pulling and go to step 2 2 Close the multi purpose tray 3 Pull the tray out 4 Open the inner cover while you are pushing the lever with two hands 6 Replace the tray 7 Open and close the front door to resume printing A If the front door is not completely closed the machine will not ope
353. ycled supplies such as toner can cause damage to cartridge or fuser unit the machine gt It can cause an explosion or fire gt In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies a service fee will be charged When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes gt Toner dust can be dangerous to humans Safety information_ 4 regulatory information This machine is certified with several regulatory statements Laser Safety Statement The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class 1 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class level during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition e Wavelenght 800 nm e Beam divergence Paraller 11 degrees Perpendicular 35 degrees e Maximum power or energy output 12 mW WARNING Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser Scanner assembly The reflected beam although invisible can damage your eyes When using this product these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire
354. ype Activating the added accessories in printer properties After installing added accessories you need to select it in the printer properties of the printer driver in order to use it 1 Install the driver See Installing USB connected machine s driver on page 3 or Installing network connected machine s driver on page 3 2 Click the Windows Start menu 3 For Windows 2000 select Settings gt Printers eFor Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes For Windows 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers 4 Right click your machine 5 For Windows XP 2003 2008 Vista press Properties eFor PS driver select PS driver and right click to open Properties For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 from context menus select the Printer properties Y If Printer properties item has mark you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer 6 In printer driver properties select Device Options In printer driver properties set the necessary options 8 Click OK N Upgrading a memory module Your machine supports DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module Use this memory module slot to install additional memory When you are expanding the memory capacity you can add a memory module to the vaca

Samsung CLX-6220 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents